2k16 CS6 Chevrolet Cruze Limited 23289323A.ai 1 5/14/2015 … · 2k16_CS6_Chevrolet_Cruze_Limited_23289323A.ai 1 5/14/2015 10:22:48 AM Chevrolet Cruze Limited Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

2k16_CS6_Chevrolet_Cruze_Limited_23289323A.ai 1 5/14/2015 10:22:48 AM2k16_CS6_Chevrolet_Cruze_Limited_23289323A.ai 1 5/14/2015 10:22:48 AM

Chevrolet Cruze Limited Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-9282844) - 2016 - crc - 4/20/15

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 24

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . 91

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 133

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 169

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 304

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 321

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 331

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andCruze are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division where itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23289323 A First Printing ©2015 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the ownermanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses


4 Introduction

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Passenger Sensing System . . . 12Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 13Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 15Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . 18Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 21Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 22Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


In Brief 7

1. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 127.

Front Fog Lamps 0 130 (IfEquipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 130.

2. Air Vents 0 167.

3. Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 127.

Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 129.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 110.

4. Instrument Cluster 0 98.

5. Driver Information Center (DIC)0 110.

6. Steering Wheel Controls 0 92.

7. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 93.

8. Infotainment 0 133.

9. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 128.

10. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 101.

11. Climate Control Systems 0 162(If Equipped).

Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 164 (If Equipped).

Heated Front Seats 0 49 (IfEquipped).

12. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 198.

13. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 191 or ManualTransmission 0 195.

14. Parking Brake 0 197.

15. Power Outlets 0 95.

16. Hazard Warning Flashers0 129.

17. Trunk Release Button. SeeTrunk 0 36.

18. Ignition Switch or KeylessIgnition Button (If Equipped).See Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 180 or IgnitionPositions (Key Access) 0 182.

19. Horn 0 93.

20. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 92.

21. Cruise Control 0 200.

22. Instrument Panel Fuse Block0 251.

23. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 102.

24. Hood Release. See Hood0 220.


8 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter may work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press the key release button toextend the key blade. The key canbe used for the ignition, if equipped,and all locks.

Press K to unlock the driver door orall doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 121.

Press and holdY to open thetrunk.

Press and hold 7 briefly to initiatevehicle locator.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys 0 24 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 26.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately, press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

3. Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 32.


In Brief 9

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the vehicle fromoutside, use the key in the door oruse the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter. From inside thevehicle, use the power door lockswitch.

See Door Locks 0 33.

Keyless Access

If equipped, use the Keyless Accesssystem to lock and unlock the door.When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe driver door handle, press thelock/unlock button. When unlocking

from the driver door, the first pressunlocks that door; press againwithin five seconds to unlock allpassenger doors. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 26.

This feature may be configured. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 121.

Power Door Locks

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks 0 34.

Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys 0 24.


10 In Brief

Press the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to close it. See Power Windows0 43.

The switches work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 187.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Front Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

See Seat Adjustment 0 47.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


In Brief 11


See Reclining Seatbacks 0 48.

Power Driver Seat

To adjust a power driver seat,if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 48.

Rear Seats

The rear seatbacks can be folded.

For detailed instructions, see RearSeats 0 51.

Heated Seats

If available, the controls are on thecenter stack. The engine must berunning to operate the heated seats.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats 0 49.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints 0 46 and SeatAdjustment 0 47.


12 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:

. Safety Belts 0 52.

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly 0 54.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 55.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 77.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 65 forimportant information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator 0 101.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.


In Brief 13

3. Turn the selector switch to theO position to deselect themirror.

See Power Mirrors 0 41.

If the vehicle has heated mirrors,see Heated Mirrors 0 41.

Vehicles with a manual mirroradjustment have controls next toeach mirror.

See Manual Mirrors 0 41.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror to viewthe area behind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

If equipped with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind. SeeManual Rearview Mirror 0 42.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

If equipped with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glare ofheadlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on eachtime the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirror0 42.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


14 In Brief

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in theheadliner.

* : Press to turn the lamps off,even when a door is open.

I : Press to turn the lamps onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ : Press to turn on the domelamps.

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are in theoverhead console.

m orn : Press the button neareach lamp to turn it on or off.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is located to the left ofthe steering column on theinstrument panel.

D : Turn the thumbwheel up ordown and hold, to brighten or dimthe instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is to theleft of the steering column on theinstrument panel.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic lamp control offor on again.


In Brief 15

AUTO : Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,instrument panel lights, andsidemarker lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights. A warningchime sounds if the driver door isopened when the ignition switch isoff and the headlamps are on.

# : If equipped with fog lamps,press to turn the lamps on or off.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 127

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 128

. Front Fog Lamps 0 130

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn.

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the lever to select the wiperspeed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

INT : Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn thexINT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. For several wipes,hold the lever down.

nL : Pull the lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 93.

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, andventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with these systems.


16 In Brief

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Temperature Control

2. Bi-level Air Mode

3. Floor Air Mode

4. Vent Air Mode

5. Fan Control

6. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

7. Defrost

8. Defog

9. Rear Window Defogger

Vehicles with Air Conditioning



3. Floor Air Mode

4. Vent Air Mode

5. Fan Control


7. Defrost

8. Air Conditioning

9. Defog

10. Recirculation


Automatic Climate Control System



3. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

4. Defrost

5. Fan Control


7. Air Conditioning

8. MODE (Air Delivery Mode)

9. Recirculation

10. Power


In Brief 17

See Climate Control Systems 0 162or Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 164 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsthe automatic transmission to beshifted similar to a manualtransmission.

Electronic Range Select (ERS)allows for the selection of a range ofgears.

See Manual Mode 0 193.

Up‐Shift Light

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, it will have an up-shiftlight that indicates when to shift tothe next higher gear for the best fueleconomy.

See Manual Transmission 0 195.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)O : Press to turn the system on andoff. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

BAND : Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.

MENU/SEL : Turn to select radiostations. Press to select a menu.

g : Press to seek the previousstation or track.

l : Press to seek the next stationor track.

Buttons 1 to 6 : Press to save andselect favorite stations.

INFO : Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation 0 136.


18 In Brief

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1 to 6 until a beep isheard.

See “Storing a Station as aFavorite” in AM-FM Radio 0 139.

Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Time or Date

To set the time and date for theradio with navigation:

1. Press CLOCK.

2. Select Set Time or Set Date.

3. Turn the MENU/SEL knob toadjust the highlighted number.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the next number.

5. To save the settings, pressBACK on the radio faceplate.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

To set the 12/24 hour format for theradio with navigation:

1. Press CLOCK.

2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.


For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicle's specificaudio system, see Clock 0 94.

Satellite RadioIf equipped, vehicles with aSiriusXM® satellite radio tuner and avalid SiriusXM satellite radiosubscription can receive SiriusXMprogramming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide

variety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:

. www.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).

. www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio 0 141.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport in the center console. Externaldevices such as iPods®, MP3players, CD changers, and USBdrives may be connected,depending on the audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices 0 146.


In Brief 19

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.

See Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) 0 150 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) 0 153 or Bluetooth(Overview) 0 148.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : For vehicles with aBluetooth, OnStar, or navigationsystem, press to interact with thosesystems. See Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) 0 150 orBluetooth (Voice Recognition) 0 153or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 148,OnStar Overview 0 334, or theinfotainment manual.

$ /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select a sourceor turn to change favorite stations.

Press _ or ^ to select AM, FM, CD,or MP3 track.

Turn _ or ^ to select the next orprevious saved favorite radiostations.

+ x − : Press + to increase thevolume. Press − to decrease thevolume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls 0 92.


20 In Brief

Cruise Control

If equipped with cruise control:

1 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off. A white indicatorcomes on in the instrument clusterwhen cruise is turned on.

RES/+ : If there is a set speed inmemory, move the thumbwheel upbriefly to resume to that speed orhold upward to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET/− : Move the thumbwheel downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasespeed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 200.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the center ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the turnsignal lever.

1. SET/CLR: Press to set,or press and hold to clear, themenu item displayed.

2. w / x : Use the band toscroll through the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display theDIC menus. This button is alsoused to return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 110.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, SBZA will detectmoving vehicles in the next laneover in the vehicle's side blind zonearea. When this happens, the SBZAdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 206.


In Brief 21

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on theinfotainment system display, whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC)0 202.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system usesa triangle with an arrow displayedon the RVC screen to warn of trafficbehind your vehicle that may crossyour vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound.

See “Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA)” under Rear Vision Camera(RVC) 0 202.

Parking AssistIf equipped, Rear Parking Assist(RPA) uses sensors on the rearbumper to assist with parking and

avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph) and usesaudible beeps to provide distanceand system information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Parking Assist 0 204.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outletlocated on the center floor consoleand one on the rear of the centerfloor console. These outlets arepowered when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 187.

See Power Outlets 0 95.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe Traction Control System (TCS)limits wheel spin. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.

The StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem also turns on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.

. To turn off traction control, pressand release the g button on thecenter console. The traction offlight i illuminates.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe g button, until the traction off

light i and the StabiliTrak OFF

light g illuminate.


22 In Brief

. Press and release the g buttonagain to turn on both systems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 198.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 176. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 261.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON DIC message when it isnecessary to change the engine oiland filter.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset the

engine oil life system press theSET/CLR button while the Oil Lifedisplay is active.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC MENU buttonand thumbwheel, scroll untilyou reach REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC (: % forCanada).

2. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%. Whenprompted, use the thumbwheelto highlight YES or NO. Pressthe SET/CLR button to confirm.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 227.


In Brief 23

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 325.


24 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 32Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 35Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 38Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 39

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 42Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 42Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 25

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

If the vehicle is equipped with akeyed ignition, the ignition key, keyrings, and RKE transmitter,if equipped, are designed to worktogether. As a system, it reducesthe risk of unintentionally movingthe key out of the RUN position.If replacements or additions arerequired, see your dealer. Limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and all locksif the vehicle is a Key access

vehicle. If the vehicle has thekeyless ignition, the key can beused for the locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 325.



With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 334.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 331.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within range. See“Keyless Access Operation” later inthis section.

The transmitter functions may workup to 60 m (195 ft) away from thevehicle.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.

Q (Lock) : Press to lock all doors.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound on thesecond press to indicate locking.See Vehicle Personalization 0 121.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors and the driverdoor will immediately unlock,if Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out isenabled through the vehiclepersonalization.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System0 38.

K (Unlock) : Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See VehiclePersonalization 0 121.

The turn signal indicators may flashto indicate unlocking. See VehiclePersonalization 0 121.

Pressing K will disarm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System0 38.



Y (Remote Trunk Release) :Press and hold to release the trunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm) : Press and hold briefly toinitiate vehicle locator. The exteriorlamps flash and the horn chirpsthree times.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash for 30 seconds,or until 7 is pressed again or thevehicle is started.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) :If equipped, press and release Qand then immediately press andhold/ for at least four seconds tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 32.

The RKE transmitter buttons will notoperate when the key is in theignition.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allowsfor the doors and trunk to be lockedand unlocked without pressing theRKE transmitter button. The RKEtransmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)of the door being opened. If thevehicle has this feature, there will bea button on the outside doorhandles.

Keyless Access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock press from thedriver door. See VehiclePersonalization 0 121.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within range ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors will unlock.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSimilar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more thanfive seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.



Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within range ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger doorhandle will unlock all doors.Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Passive Locking

If equipped with Keyless Access,the vehicle will lock several secondsafter all doors are closed if thevehicle is off and at least one RKEtransmitter has been removed ornone remain in the vehicle.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, thedoors may lock with the RKE

transmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see Vehicle Personalization0 121.

Temporary Disable of PassiveLocking Feature

Temporarily disable the passivelocking by pressing and holding Kon the interior door switch with adoor open for at least four seconds,or until three chimes are heard.Passive locking will then remaindisabled until Q on the interior dooris pressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Press the touch pad on the rear ofthe trunk above the license plate toopen the trunk when the RKEtransmitter is in range.

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 33.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Any remainingtransmitters will need to bereprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersmatched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Key Vehicles Only)

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn the key to the ON/RUN position.

2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF,and remove the key.

3. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds.



The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeyVehicles Only)

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that owners see their dealer.

If there are no currently recognizedkeys available, follow this procedureto program the first key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys you wish to program must bewith you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn to ON/RUN. The securitylight will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turnto ON/RUN; the key is learnedand all previously known keyswill no longer work with thevehicle.

Remaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Key Vehicles Only).”

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Remove the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage areanext to the accessory poweroutlet toward the front of theconsole, to access thetransmitter slot. Press thebutton on the recognizedtransmitter to extend the keyblade. Insert the key blade intothe transmitter slot.

2. Insert the vehicle key of thenew transmitter into the keylock cylinder on the outside ofthe driver door and turn the keyto the unlock position five timeswithin 10 seconds.



The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.

3. Remove the recognized keyand place the new transmitterinto the transmitter slot.

4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the ENGINE START/STOP button for 12 seconds toexit programming mode.Replace the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage area.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter (KeylessAccess Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to fivetransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters you wishto program must be with you.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder on the outside of thedriver door and turn the key tothe unlock position five timeswithin 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ENGINESTART/STOP button.

The DIC displays will againshow REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE# 1.

4. Remove the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage areanext to the accessory power



outlet toward the front of theconsole, to access thetransmitter slot. Press thebutton on the recognizedtransmitter to extend the keyblade. Insert the key blade intothe transmitter slot.

5. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. When thetransmitter is learned the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter slot andpress K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the ENGINE START/STOP button for 12 seconds toexit programming mode.Replace the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage area.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED when tying to start thevehicle. The REPLACE BATTERYIN REMOTE KEY message mayalso be displayed at this time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Remove the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage areanext to the accessory poweroutlet toward the front of theconsole, to access thetransmitter slot.

2. Press the button on therecognized transmitter toextend the key blade. Insert thekey blade into thetransmitter slot.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the ENGINE START/STOP button. See Starting theEngine 0 184 for additionalinformation about the vehicle'skeyless ignition withpushbutton start.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. SeeKey and Lock Messages 0 117.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.



The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Press the button on thetransmitter to extend the keyblade.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying it with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push thebattery down until it is held inplace. Replace with a CR2032or equivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, this feature allows theengine to be started from outsidethe vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) : Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear fog indicator light does notcome on during remote start. If thevehicle has heated seats, they maycome on during a remote start. SeeHeated Front Seats 0 49.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 26.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press and release Q.2. Immediately after completing

Step 1, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until theturn signal lamps flash. Theturn signal lamps flashingconfirms the request to remotestart the vehicle has beenreceived.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. After 30 seconds,repeat the steps if a 10-minuteextension is desired. Remote startcan be extended only once.



Place the ignition to ON/RUN/START.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1–2 while the engine is stillrunning. An extension can berequested, 30 seconds afterstarting.

The remote start can beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off to useremote start again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.


. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:

. The key is in the ignition (KeyAccess) or if the key is in thevehicle (Keyless Access).

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The malfunction indicator lampis on.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or asingle remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stoppingthe vehicle. Lock the doorsto help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door fromoutside the vehicle, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.From inside the vehicle, use thepower door lock switch or themanual lock knob.

If equipped with Keyless Access,pushing down the manual lock knobon the driver door will lock all doors.

The doors can also be unlockedfrom the inside by pulling the doorhandle. Pulling the door handleagain unlatches the door.

Keyless Access

If equipped, use the Keyless Accesssystem to lock and unlock the door.When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the driver door handle, press thelock/unlock button. When unlockingfrom the driver door, the first pressunlocks that door; press againwithin five seconds to unlock all

passenger doors. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 26.

Power Door Locks

Q (Lock) : Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock) : Press to unlock thedoors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the actuallocking of the doors untilfive seconds after all doors areclosed.



Delayed locking can only be turnedon when the Open or UnlockedDoor Anti Lockout feature has beenturned off.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch with the door open,a chime will sound three timesindicating that delayed locking isactive.

The doors will then lockautomatically five seconds after alldoors are closed. If a door isreopened before five seconds haveelapsed, the five-second timer willreset once all the doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again, or press Q on the RKEtransmitter, to override this featureand lock the doors immediately.

Delayed locking can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization 0 121.

Automatic Door LocksWhen the doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park) for anautomatic transmission, or thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for a manual transmission,the doors will lock.

To unlock the doors:

. Press K.

. For automatic transmissions,shift the vehicle into P (Park).

. For manual transmissions and akeyed ignition system, removethe key from the ignition whenparked.

. For manual transmissions and apushbutton start system, turn thevehicle off when parked.

The automatic door lock featurecannot be disabled.

See Vehicle Personalization 0 121.

Lockout ProtectionKeyed Ignition : When locking isrequested with the driver door openand the key in the ignition, all thedoors will lock and then the driverdoor will unlock.

This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Pushbutton Start : When lockingis requested with the driver dooropen and the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,all the doors will lock and then thedriver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open,when all doors are closed thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is detected and thenumber of RKE transmitters insidehas not reduced, the driver door willunlock.

This can be manually overridden bypressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.



Open/Unlocked Door Anti Lockout

If equipped with Keyless Access,Open/Unlocked Door Anti Lockout,when on, will unlock the driver doorif locking is requested while thedriver door is open. This feature canbe turned on or off using the vehiclepersonalization menus. See VehiclePersonalization 0 121.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Manual Safety Locks

If equipped, the safety lock islocated on the inside edge of therear doors. To use the safety lock:

1. Insert the key into the safetylock slot and turn it so the slotis in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:

1. Unlock the door by activatingthe inside handle, by using thepower door lock switch, or byusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

2. Open the door from theoutside.

To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open itfrom the outside.

2. Insert the key into the safetylock slot and turn it so the slotis in the vertical position. Dothe same for the other door.

Doors

Trunk

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

. If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 190.

Press the trunk release button toopen the trunk. The vehicle must beoff, or stopped with the parking

brake applied for manualtransmissions, or the shift lever inP (Park) for automatictransmissions.

To open the trunk from outside thevehicle, pressY on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,or press the touch pad above thelicense plate when the doors areunlocked.

If equipped with Keyless Access,the trunk may be opened while thevehicle is locked by pressing thetouch pad above the license platewhile the RKE transmitter is within1 m (3 ft) of the rear of the vehicle.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Caution

Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damagethe handle.



There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handle onthe trunk lid. The handle will glowfollowing exposure to light. Pull therelease handle to open the trunkfrom the inside.

Return to the stored positionafter use.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system:

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the trunkis open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Close the trunk and the hood.Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem, if equipped.

. With a door open, press theinterior Q.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash indicating thealarm system is operating.Pressing Q on the RKEtransmitter a second time will



bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

If a door, the hood, or the trunk isopened without first disarming thesystem, the turn signals will flashand the horn will sound for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

Do one of the following to disarmthe alarm system or turn off thealarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system,if equipped.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have left the vehicleand all doors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter or use theKeyless Access system,if equipped.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps andthe lamps flash three times, analarm occurred previously while thealarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages 0 119.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 331.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches an



immobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only an authorized keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Manual Mirrors

If equipped, there are adjustmentcontrols next to each mirror.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirror:

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to theO position to deselect themirror.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsThe rear window defogger alsoheats the outside mirrors,if equipped.

= : Press to heat the outsiderearview mirrors. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Automatic ClimateControl System 0 164.



Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, the vehiclemay have three control buttons atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview 0 334.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in a



pulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys 0 24.

Press the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to close it.

The switches work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 187.

Express Window Operation

This vehicle may have windows withan express-up or down feature. Thisfeature allows the window to belowered or raised without holdingthe switch. Passenger side and rearwindows only have express-down.Pull a window switch up or push it

down all the way, release it, and thewindow goes down or upautomatically. Stop the window bypushing or pulling the switch.

Obstacle Detection Feature

If equipped with express-up, and anobject is in the path of the windowwhen closing, the window will stopat the obstruction and auto-reverseto a preset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe cold and/or ice may also cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will returnto normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.

If conditions prevent the windowfrom closing and the windowcontinues to auto-reverse, it ispossible to close the window withthe ignition in ON/RUN by holdingthe window switch in the partially orfully pulled up position. Release ofthe switch from the partially pulledup position will cause the window tostop. Release of the switch from thefully pulled up position will activatethe express-up and related obstacledetection features.



Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, the windows willneed to be reprogrammed for theexpress-up feature to work. Beforereprogramming, replace or rechargethe vehicle's battery.

To program each front window:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or when RAP is active, closeall doors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switchup until the window is fullyclosed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

PressZ to activate the rearwindow lockout. The indicator lightcomes on when activated.

PressZ again to deactivate thelockout.

If the indicator light flashes, thefeature may not be working properly.

Overload Feature

If the windows are operatedrepeatedly in short intervals, thewindow operation is disabled for ashort time.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow or, if equipped, extendalong the rod.



Roof

Sunroof

The sunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 187.

To open or close the sunroof, pressthe open or close sunroof switch (1)to the first detent position.

To express open or close thesunroof with the safety functionenabled, press the open or close

sunroof switch (1) to the seconddetent position and release. To stopthe movement, press the switchagain.

To automatically tilt or close thesunroof, press the tilt open or closesunroof switch (2).

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

Sunshade

The sunshade is manually operated.Close or open the sunshade bysliding. When the sunroof isopened, the sunshade isalways open.

Safety Function

If the sunroof has any resistanceduring automatic closing, it willimmediately stop and reverse.

To override the safety function,press and hold the close sunroofswitch. The sunroof closes withoutthe safety function. To stop themovement, release the switch.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.


46 Seats and Restraints

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 48Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 48Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . 57Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 58Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 60When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Passenger Sensing System . . . 65Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 69

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 70Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Infants and Young Children . . . . 72Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 74Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 76Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 77

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Securing Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front and rear seatshave adjustable head restraints inthe outboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.


Seats and Restraints 47

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 77.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.



2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust the power driver seat,if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks 0 48.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.



If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to accessthe lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatbackin place.


To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Heated Front Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates against

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

heat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If available, the controls are on thecenter stack. The engine must berunning to operate the heated seats.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the control to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat indicator lights onthe control do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 32 andVehicle Personalization 0 121.



Rear SeatsEither side of the rear seatback canbe folded.

To fold the rear seatbacks:

1. Place the front seatbacks in theupright position. See RecliningSeatbacks 0 48.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

2. Unbuckle the rear safety beltsand make sure the safety beltbuckles are stowed in thepockets in the seat cushion.

3. Make sure the safety belt is inthe guide on top of theseatback.

4. Reach under the safety beltand pull the lever to unlock theseatback.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

5. Fold the seatback forward.

Repeat Steps 1–4 for the otherseatback, if desired.

To raise the seatback:

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could be

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

seriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

1. Make sure the safety belt is inthe guide on the top of theseatback.

2. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward until it clicks intoplace. Keep the safety beltsclear of the seatback anduntwisted.

A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

The center rear safety belt maylock when you raise theseatback. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

{ Warning

If the seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always pull forward on the top ofthe seatback at the area of thelatch to be sure it is locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked intoposition.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 for the otherseatback, if necessary.

Keep the seat in the upright lockedposition when not in use.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders 0 100.

This vehicle may have the SafetyBelt Assurance System, which mayprevent the vehicle from shifting outof P (Park). See Safety BeltMessages 0 118.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.



How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren 0 70 or Infants and YoungChildren 0 72. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulderbelt under both arms orbehind your back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender 0 57.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.



5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Always stow the safety belt slowly.If the safety belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull thesafety belt straight out firmly tounlock the webbing, and thenrelease it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andfront outboard passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly 0 54.

Press the release button and movethe height adjuster to the desiredposition. The adjuster can be movedup by pushing the slide/trim up.After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of a



moderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. Safety beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 58.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for the rearoutboard seating positions.Instructions are included with theguide.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likely

that the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.



Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders 0 100.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care 0 58.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 101.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver.

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A knee airbag for the driver.

. A knee airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? 0 62.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The safety belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 70 orInfants and Young Children 0 72.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 101 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On vehicles with second rowseat-mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 59.Airbags are designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds are used to

predict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to either crash severity oroccupant interaction.

Knee airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal impacts. Knee airbagsare not designed to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, in rear impacts,or in many side impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.



Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 60.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 62.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 60.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not



prevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.

The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. You can lock the doors,and turn off the interior lamps, andturn off the hazard warning flashersby using the controls for thosefeatures.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 332and Event Data Recorders0 333.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol for

on or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 101.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

inflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines that aninfant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbag(s) are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 101.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbag(s) to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag(s) areactive.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,

depending upon the person'sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 101 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if the systemdetermines that an infant is present



in a child restraint. If a child restrainthas been installed and the onindicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat) 0 84 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) 0 86.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 46.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag(s) fora child in a child restraint dependingupon the child's size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, seatmassagers, a laptop, or otherelectronic devices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for one minute afterthe on indicator is lit.



{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 69for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:

. The passenger sensing systemmay turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on the

passenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 101 for importantsafety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.



Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 330.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, any of the airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GM

covers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 65.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 269 for additionalimportant information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any other



reason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 323.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 101.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 60. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 101.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide, if available.See “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 55. If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 55.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safety

restraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.



Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, the



restraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

restraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 77. Children canbe endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions are



important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 65 for additional information.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if the

child restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCH

attachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the



child restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.



Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor) : Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor) : Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child



restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 76 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it is

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

wrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 76 foradditional information.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not have

lower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired rear outboardseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For outboard rear seatingpositions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of thechild restraint, the headrestraint may be removed.See “Head RestraintRemoval andReinstallation” at the endof this section.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,

attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If you are using a singletether in a rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,raise the head restraintand route the tether under



the head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

If you are using a dualtether in a rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,raise the head restraintand route the tether underthe head restraint andaround the head restraintposts.

If you are using a singletether in the centerseating position, or therear outboard headrestraint has beenremoved, route the singletether over the seatback.

If you are using a dualtether in the centerseating position, or therear outboard head

restraint has beenremoved, route the dualtether over the seatback.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats 0 51for additional information.



2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the sametime, and pull up on the headrestraint.

3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.

4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches on theposts must face the driver sideof the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints 0 46.

3. Try to move the head restraintto make sure that it is locked inplace.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 77 for how and where to

install the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 77 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 76.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation ofthe child restraint, the headrestraint may be removed. See“Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 77.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 77.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If thehead restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 77.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 76.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand passenger knee airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System 0 65 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 101 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboard

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 65 for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 77 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag and passenger kneeairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 101.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle's safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side-to-sideand back-and-forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 65 for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 89

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . 89Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Center Console Storage . . . . . . . 89

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever.

CupholdersCupholders are in the centerconsole.

Cupholders may be located in thesecond row seat armrest. Toaccess, pull the armrest down.

Center Console StorageThe center console storage has astorage area under the armrest. Pullup on the latch on the front of thearmrest to access.


90 Storage

Pull up on the latch and slide thecenter console armrest to adjust theposition. Return the armrest to therear position to access thestorage area.

There may be an auxiliary jackoutlet and a USB port located in thecenter console.

See Auxiliary Devices 0 146.


Instruments and Controls 91

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 92Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 92Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 93Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 100Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 101

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 102Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 102

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Power Steering WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . 106Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 107Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 107Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 108Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 109Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 109Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 109Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 110Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Brake System Messages . . . . . 115Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . 115Cruise Control Messages . . . . . 115Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . 115Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . 116Engine Power Messages . . . . . 116Fuel System Messages . . . . . . . 116Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . 117Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Airbag System Messages . . . . . 118Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . . 118Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 119Service Vehicle Messages . . . . 119Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Transmission Messages . . . . . . 120Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120


92 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 121

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g (Push to Talk) : For vehicleswith a Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Infotainment Controls)0 150 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) 0 153 or Bluetooth(Overview) 0 148, OnStar Overview0 334, or the infotainment manual.



$ /i (Mute/End Call) : Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Source/Favorite) : Pressto select a source or turn to changefavorite stations.

Press _ or ^ to select AM, FM, CD,or MP3 track.

Turn _ or ^ to select the next orprevious saved favorite radiostations.

+ x − (Volume) : Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris on the right side of the steeringcolumn.

With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,move the windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

INT (Intermittent Wipes) : Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X (Mist) : For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

nL(Windshield Washer) : Pull thewindshield wiper lever toward you tospray washer fluid and activate thewipers. The wipers will continueuntil the lever is released or themaximum wash time is reached.When the lever is released,additional wipes may occurdepending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid 0 236for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.



Damaged blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 241.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are on LO, HI, or INT, theywill immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing, the wiperscontinue to run until they reach thebase of the windshield.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna,located on the roof, for long periodsof time with objects that mayinterfere with the antenna's ability toreceive a satellite signal. Thecompass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again. SeeCompass Messages 0 115 for moreinformation on the messages thatmay be displayed for the compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation 0 136 forinformation about how to use themenu system. For vehicles with aconnective radio or navigationsystem, see the infotainmentmanual.

Setting the Time and Date

To set the time and date for theradio with CD:

1. Press CLOCK.




5. To save the settings, press theMENU/SEL knob.

To set the time and date for theradio without navigation:

1. Press CLOCK.






5. To save the settings, press OKscreen button.

To set the time and date for theradio with navigation:

1. Press CLOCK.





If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

To set the 12/24 hour format for theradio with CD:

1. Press CLOCK.



4. To save the settings, press theMENU/SEL knob.

To set the 12/24 hour format for theradio without navigation:

1. Press CLOCK.



4. To save the settings, press OKscreen button.

To set the 12/24 hour format for theradio with navigation:

1. Press CLOCK.




Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outletlocated on the center floor consoleand one on the rear of the centerfloor console. These outlets arepowered when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 187.

Open the cover to access.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.



Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 216.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter, itis on the center floor console nearthe shift lever.

To activate the cigarette lighter,push it into the heating element andlet go. When the lighter is ready itwill pop back out.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysIf equipped with a removableashtray, the ashtray can be placedinto the front console cupholders.

To open the ashtray, lift the lid of theashtray. After using, close the lid.

To empty the ashtray for cleaning,slightly turn the upper part of theashtray counterclockwise andremove it.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Cluster with Automatic Transmission Shown, Metric and Manual Transmission Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 110.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, andthe damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the rpm’sin the warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

A FUEL LEVEL LOW message mayappear in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and a single chimesounds. See Fuel SystemMessages 0 116 for moreinformation.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.



. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and will go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge toward the Hor shaded area, the engine istoo hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 65.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 59.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages0 118.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 65 for importantsafety information. The instrumentpanel has a passenger airbag statusindicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, after



several seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or the on or off symbol to let youknow the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag are allowed toinflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag andpassenger knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 101 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inON/RUN with the engine notrunning for Key Access or in ServiceOnly Mode for Keyless Access. SeeIgnition Positions (Keyless Access)0 180 or Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) 0 182.



Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 219.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.

If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow theprevious guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. A loose or missing fuel cap maycause the light to come on. SeeFilling the Tank 0 209. A fewdriving trips with the capproperly installed may turn thelight off.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require at



least one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. See Fuel0 208.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 216. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNwith the engine not running forKey Access or in Service OnlyMode for Keyless Access.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.



{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 291.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light stays on afterdriving at a speed above 20 km/h(13 mph), see your dealer forservice. A chime may also soundwhen the light comes on steady.

If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warning

light is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light0 104.

See Brake System Messages 0 115for all brake‐related DIC messages.

Up-Shift Light

For manual transmission vehicles,there is an up-shift light that comeson in the lower DIC area. It showswhen to shift to the next higher gearfor best fuel economy.

See Manual Transmission 0 195.



Power Steering WarningLight

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned to ON/RUN as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If this light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, the system may not beworking. If this happens, see yourdealer for service.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.




Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak systemis actively working.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages 0 119.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressure0 260.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 262.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.



This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 110 formore information.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 39.



Reduced Engine PowerLight

The reduced engine power lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

This light, along with the malfunctionindicator lamp, displays when anoticeable reduction in the vehicle'sperformance occurs.

The vehicle can be driven at areduced speed when the reducedengine power light is on butacceleration and speed might bereduced. If this light stays on, seeyour dealer as soon as possible fordiagnosis and repair.

High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 127 for more information.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps,this light comes on when the frontfog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the frontfog lamps are turned off. See FrontFog Lamps 0 130 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls 0 127.



Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl 0 200.

Door Ajar Light

If equipped, this light comes onwhen a door is open or not securelylatched. Before driving, check thatall doors are properly closed. SeeDoor Ajar Messages 0 115.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays information aboutyour vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. See VehicleMessages 0 114. All messagesappear in the DIC display in thecenter of the instrument cluster.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal lever.The DIC displays trip, fuel, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.



DIC Buttons

1. SET/CLR: Press to set,or press and hold to clear, themenu item displayed.

2. wx : Use the band to scrollthrough the items ineach menu.

3. MENU: Press to display theTrip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu. On somevehicles, there is also an ECOMenu. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu (TRIP) Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the TRIP menu displays.Usewx to scroll through themenu items. Not all items are

available on every vehicle. Thefollowing is a list of all possiblemenu items:

Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average FuelEconomy, Average VehicleSpeed : Displays the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), fromthe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing and holding theSET/CLR button while the tripodometer display is showing.

Also displays the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). This number is based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. This number reflects onlythe approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change. This display isshown as . c L/100 km (mpg).Reset the average consumption bypressing SET/CLR when it isdisplayed.

This screen also displays theaverage vehicle speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Thisaverage is based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset. This display is shownas c km/h (mph). Reset theaverage speed by pressing SET/CLR when it is displayed.

Blank Display : Displays noinformation.

Digital Speed : Displays how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Fuel Used : Displays theapproximate liters (L) or gallons (gal)of fuel that have been used sincelast reset. The fuel used can bereset by pressing the SET/CLRbutton while the Fuel Used displayis showing.

Timer : To start the timer, pressSET/CLR while Timer is displayed.The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timerwas last reset, not including time the



ignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,and 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Navigation : Used for the OnStar ornavigation system Turn-by-Turnguidance. See OnStar Overview0 334 or the navigation manual,if the vehicle has navigation, formore information.

Speed, Fuel Range,Instantaneous Fuel Economy :Displays how fast the vehicle ismoving in either kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).The speedometer cannot be reset.

The center of the page shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling. Thefuel range estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving history

and the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This display is shownas l . km (mi). Fuel range cannotbe reset.

Also displays the current fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number reflectsonly the fuel economy that thevehicle has right now and changesfrequently as driving conditionschange. This display is shown as .L/100 km (mpg). This display cannotbe reset.

Vehicle Information Menu(OPTION) Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the OPTION menu isdisplayed. Usewx to scrollthrough the menu items. Not allitems are available on every vehicle.The following is a list of all possiblemenu items:

Units : Movewx to changebetween Metric or US when the Unitdisplay is active. Press SET/CLR toconfirm the setting. On some

models, you will have to select 1, 2,or 3 for the Unit display. 1 isImperial units, 2 is US units, and 3is metric units. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC tothe type of measurements youselect.

Tire Pressure : May display avehicle with the approximatepressures of all four tires. Tirepressure is displayed in eitherkilopascal (kPa) or in pounds persquare inch (psi). On some models,this display only allows for matchingof the TPMS sensors. In this case,the display will show TIRE LEARN.See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 261 and Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 262.

Remaining Oil Life : Displays anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. This displaymay be shown as: %.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages 0 116.



The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 225.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 305.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. Do not resetthe Oil Life display accidentally atany time other than when the oil hasjust been changed. It cannot bereset accurately until the next oilchange. To reset the engine oil lifesystem, see Engine Oil Life System0 227.

Battery Voltage : Displays thecurrent battery voltage, if equipped.Battery voltage changes are normalwhile driving. See Charging SystemLight 0 102. If there is a problemwith the battery charging system,the DIC will display a message. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 114.

ECO Drive Assist Menu (ECO)Items

This menu is only available on somevehicles. Press MENU on the turnsignal lever until the ECO menu isdisplayed. Usewx to scrollthrough the menu items. Not allitems are available on every vehicle.The following is a list of all possiblemenu items:

Best Average Fuel Economy : Theright hand side displays the bestaverage fuel economy (AFE) that isachieved for a selected distance.The left hand side displays arunning average of fuel economy forthe most recently traveled selecteddistance. The center bar graphdisplays the instantaneous fueleconomy. Quickly press the SET/CLR button to display a page forselecting one of the distanceoptions. Move the up/down arrow tochoose the selection, and SET/CLRto change the setting.

When viewing best AFE, a severalsecond press and hold of SET/CLRwill reset the best value. The bestvalue will show “- - -“ until theselected distance has beentraveled.

The display provides feedback onhow current driving behavior in thebar graph affects the runningaverage in the left display and howwell recent driving compares to thebest that has been achieved.

ECO Index : The bar graph on theleft hand side provides feedback onthe efficiency of current drivingbehavior. The graph showsa percentage value that is based oncurrent fuel consumption comparedto what is expected from the vehiclewith good and bad driving habits.Each box represents 10%, with allboxes filled being 100%. Moreeconomical driving will result inbeing in the ECO box.Instantaneous Fuel Economy is alsoshown on right hand side. Thisdisplay cannot be reset.



Economy Trend : Displays historyof the Average Fuel Economy fromthe last 50 km (30 miles). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 miles) ofdriving. The fuel economy will rangefrom 0 – 15 L/100 km (0 – 50 mpg).During driving the bars will shift toalways reflect the most recentdistance on the right side. Thisdisplay cannot be reset.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.

The following are some of thevehicle messages that may bedisplayed depending on yourvehicle content.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Battery -North America 0 239.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.



Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid 0 238.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed as areminder that the parking brake ison. Release it before you attempt todrive.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass 0 94.

– –

Two dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORECRUISE

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake pedal and try again.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl 0 200.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR(S) OPEN

A vehicle symbol will be displayedon the DIC showing which door isopen along with this message.Close the door completely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.



ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating 0 234.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System 0 227and Driver Information Center (DIC)0 110 for information on how toreset the system. See Engine Oil0 225 and Maintenance Schedule0 305 for more information.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.



TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with Keyless Access. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 26.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced. See “BatteryReplacement” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 26.

USE TRANSMITTER POCKETTO START

This message displays when tryingto start the vehicle if an RKEtransmitter is not detected. Thetransmitter battery may be weak.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 26.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on. See Automatic HeadlampSystem 0 128.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned off. See Automatic HeadlampSystem 0 128.

XXX TURN INDICATORFAILURE

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement 0 242 andReplacement Bulbs 0 247 for moreinformation on turn signal bulbreplacement.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when theRear Parking Assist (RPA) systemhas been turned off or when there isa temporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled. See ParkingAssist 0 204.



SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system. Do not usethis system to help you park. SeeParking Assist 0 204.

SERVICE SIDE DETECTIONSYSTEM

If this message appears, the systemneeds service. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF

This message indicates that thedriver has turned the system off.

SIDE DETECTION SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

This message indicates that theSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)system is disabled because thesensor is blocked and cannot detectvehicles in the blind zone. Thesensor may be blocked by mud, dirt,snow, ice, or slush. This messagemay also activate during heavy rainor due to road spray. The vehicledoes not need service. For cleaning,see Exterior Care 0 294.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 198.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 198.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Safety Belt Messages

SHIFTER LOCKED. BUCKLESEATBELT

This message displays if the vehicleis equipped with the Safety BeltAssurance System and the driverand front outboard passenger,if present, safety belts are notbuckled. The vehicle will not shiftout of P (Park). Buckle the safetybelt(s) to unlock the shift lever.

This system may not allow thevehicle to shift out of P (Park) if anobject - such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device - is on thefront outboard passenger seat.If this happens, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

If the driver or front outboardpassenger unbuckles their safetybelt while driving, the safety beltreminder chime and light(s) willcome on. See Safety BeltReminders 0 100.



SHIFTER UNLOCKED. BRAKETO SHIFT

This message displays when theSafety Belt Assurance System timesout and allows the vehicle to beshifted out of P (Park) after30 seconds following brake apply.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index forinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

This system may not functionproperly if the airbag readiness lightis on. See Airbag Readiness Light0 101.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

CHANGE TIMING BELT

This message displays whenscheduled maintenance on thetiming belt is required. See yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays and a chimemay sound when there may be aproblem with the power steeringsystem. If this message displaysand a reduction in steeringperformance or loss of powersteering assistance is noticed, seeyour dealer.

SERVICE STEERINGCOLUMN LOCK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the steering columnlock. Take the vehicle to your dealerfor service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays if there is aproblem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Starting the VehicleMessages

TURN STEERING WHEELSTART VEHICLE AGAIN

This message displays when you tryto start the vehicle, but the columnremains locked. Try turning thesteering wheel while starting thevehicle to unlock the steeringcolumn. If the vehicle still does notstart, turn the steering wheel theother way, and try starting thevehicle again.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation 0 262for more information.



TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 262 for more information.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

There is also an icon with thewarning that will indicate thelocation of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light 0 107.

If a tire pressure message displays,inflate the tires until the tire pressureis equal to the values shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Tires 0 253, Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176, and Tire Pressure0 260.

More than one tire pressuremessage can be received at a time.To read the other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the SET/CLR button.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 110.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

STEERING COLUMN ISLOCKED

This message displays when thesteering column is locked.



VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Infotainment System AudioSystem Controls

Using the Faceplate

MENU/SELECT Knob

. Press to enter, select, or activatea highlighted menu option.

. Turn to highlight a menu option.

. Press to enable or disable asystem setting.

/ BACK

. Press to exit a menu.

. Press to return to a previousscreen.

Using the Touch Screen

Press a screen feature to:

. View more feature options.

. Enable or disable the feature.

w : Press to scroll up.

x : Press to scroll down.

Back : Press to return to theprevious menu.

To access thepersonalization menu:

1. Press Config on the Homepage on the infotainmentsystem display or CONFIG onthe faceplate.

2. Select the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

3. Select the desired featuresetting.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Languages

. Time and Date

. Radio Settings

. Phone Settings

. Navigation Settings

. Display Settings

. Vehicle Settings

Each menu is detailed in thefollowing information.

Languages

Select Languages, then select fromthe available language(s).

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 94.

Radio Settings

Select and depending on the radiothe following may display:

. Auto Volume

. Gracenote Options

. XM Channel Art

. Max Startup Volume

. Maximum Startup Volume

. Number of Favorites Pages



. Radio Favorites

. RDS Options

. XM Categories

. Software Versions Menu

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volume tominimize the effects of unwantedbackground noise that can resultfrom changing road surfaces, drivingspeeds, or open windows. Thisfeature works best at lower volumesettings where background noise istypically louder than the soundsystem volume.

Select Off, Low, Medium, or High.

Gracenote Options

Select and the following maydisplay:

. Normalization

Normalization

This feature improves voicerecognition and media groupings.See “CD Player,” “USB,” “AuxiliaryDevices,” and “Bluetooth Audio” inthe infotainment manual.

Select to enable or disable.

XM Channel Art

This feature turns the XM Audiopage background on the XMChannel display on and off.


Max Startup Volume or MaximumStartup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level.

Press + or − to increase ordecrease the volume.

Number of Favorites Pages orRadio Favorites

Press to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number.

RDS Options


. RDS

. Text Scroll Freeze

. RDS Text

RDS

Select to turn RDS on or off. See“RDS (Radio Data System)” inAM-FM Radio 0 139.

Text Scroll Freeze

When on, this allows the RDS Textto scroll across the radio screen.


RDS Text

When on, this allows the RDSinformation from the station to bedisplayed.


XM Categories

This allows which available XMCategories are used and displayed.

Press to enable or disable availablecategories.

Software Versions Menu

Press to display information aboutthe system and update software ifavailable.



Phone Settings


. Device List

. Pair Device

. Pair Device (Phone)

. Pair Device (GPS)

Device List

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Pair Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing a Phone/Device” in“Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

Pair Device (Phone) or PairDevice (GPS)

Select to pair a new phone. See“Pairing a Phone” in “Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls)” in Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) 0 150 orBluetooth (Voice Recognition) 0 153or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 148 or

“Pairing a Phone/Device”“Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

Navigation Settings

See “Navigation Settings” under“Configure Menu” in theinfotainment manual.

Display Settings

Press and the following maydisplay:

. Home Page Menu

. Rear Camera Options

. Display Off

. Map Settings

Home Page Menu


. Customize

. Sort

. Restore Home Page Defaults

Customize

This feature allows the selection ofwhat icons will be on the firstHome Page.

Select and follow the screenprompts.

Sort

This feature allows the icons on theHome Page to be moved.


Restore Home Page Defaults

This feature will restore the HomePage to the factory settings.


Rear Camera Options

For more information on RearCamera Options, see Rear VisionCamera (RVC) 0 202.

Display Off

Press to turn the display off. Thedisplay will return when any radiobuttons are pressed or the screen istouched (if equipped).



Map Settings

See “Map Settings” in “ConfigureMenu” in the infotainment manual.

Vehicle Settings


. Climate and Air Quality

. Comfort and Convenience

. Collision Detection Systems

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

. Return to Factory Settings?

Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This feature sets the climate controlfan speed to maintain the interiortemperature.

Select High, Medium, or Low.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Select On or Off.

Auto Defog

When turned on and high humidityis detected, the climate controlsystem may adjust to outside airsupply and turn on the airconditioner or the heater. The fanspeed may slightly increase to helpprevent fogging. When highhumidity is no longer detected, thesystem will return to its prioroperation.

Select On or Off.

Auto Rear Defog

When on, this feature turns on therear defogger at vehicle start whenthe interior temperature is cold and

fog is likely. The auto rear defogfunction can be disabled bypressing1. When off, the feature

can be turned on by pressing1.See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems 0 162 orAutomatic Climate Control System0 164.

Select On or Off.

Comfort and Convenience


. Chime Volume

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Select Normal or High.

Collision Detection Systems


. Park Assist

. Side Blind Zone Alert

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert



Park Assist

This allows the Parking Assistfeature to be turned on or off. SeeParking Assist 0 204.

Select On or Off.

Side Blind Zone Alert

This allows the Side Blind ZoneAlert feature to be turned on or off.See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 206.

Select On or Off.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the Rear Cross TrafficAlert feature to be turned on or off.

Select On or Off. See “Rear CrossTraffic Alert” in Rear Vision Camera(RVC) 0 202.

Lighting


. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,or 2 Minutes.

Power Door Locks


. Open Door Anti Lock Out

. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Open Door Anti Lock Out orUnlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking until thedoor is closed. If this feature isturned on, the Delayed Door Lockmenu will not be available.


Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill automatically unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park) withan automatic transmission or whenthe key is removed from the ignitionwith a manual transmission withkeyed ignition or when the vehicle isturned off with a manualtransmission with pushbutton start.

Select All Doors, Driver Door,or OFF.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. See DelayedLocking 0 34.


Remote Lock/Unlock/Start


. Remote Unlock Feedback

. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock



. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle

Remote Unlock Feedback orRemote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Depending on the radio select FlashLights or OFF, or select to enable ordisable.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of whatfeedback is provided whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter.

Select Lights and Horn, Lights Only,Horn Only, or Off.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock on the first press of K onthe RKE transmitter.

Select Driver Door or All Doors.

If Driver Door is selected, all doorswill unlock on the second pressof K within five seconds of the priorpress.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorsare unlocked by pressing the buttonon the outside door handle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selection of thetype of feedback.

Select Off, On, or On with HornChirp.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle.

Select Off or On.

Return to Factory Settings?

This returns all of the vehiclepersonalization settings to thefactory settings.

Select Yes or No.


Lighting 127

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 127Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 129Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Battery Power Protection . . . . . 132Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is to theleft of the steering column on theinstrument panel.

There are four positions:

O (Off) : Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic lamp controloff or on again.

AUTO (Automatic) : Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with theparking lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, instrument panel lights,and sidemarker lamps.

; (Parking Lamps) : Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

5 (Headlamps) : Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened when the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

# (Front Fog Lamps) :If equipped, press to turn the lampson or off.

See Front Fog Lamps 0 130.

When the lights are on,; will belit. See Lamps On Reminder 0 109.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer


128 Lighting

3 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger) : Push the turn signallever away from you and release toturn the high beams on.

To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever all the way towardyou. Then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:

. The ignition is in the ON/RUN mode.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is released orthe vehicle is not in P (Park).

When the DRL are on, only thelow-beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel, and other lamps will notbe on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL off or on again, turnthe exterior lamp control to the offposition and then release. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, theDRL cannot be turned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamp control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls 0 127.


Lighting 129

The vehicle has a light sensor ontop of the instrument panel. Makesure it is not covered, or theheadlamps will be on when they arenot needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel. If thevehicle is started in a dark garage,the automatic headlamp systemcomes on immediately. If it is lightoutside when the vehicle leaves thegarage, there is a slight delaybefore the automatic headlampsystem changes to the DRL. Duringthat delay, the instrument clustermay not be as bright as usual. Makesure the instrument panelillumination control is in the fullbright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control 0 130.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher) :Press and momentarily hold thisbutton on the center stack, to makethe front and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressand momentarily hold again to turnthe flashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterwill flash in the direction of the turnor lane change.


130 Lighting

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out. Replace anyburned out bulbs. If a bulb is notburned out, check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers 0 248.

Front Fog Lamps

For vehicles with front fog lamps,the button is on the outboard side ofthe instrument panel.

The ignition must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.

# (Front Fog Lamps) : Press toturn the fog lamps on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the foglamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

If the high-beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high-beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is to the left of thesteering column on the instrumentpanel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness) : Move thethumbwheel up or down and hold, tobrighten or dim the instrument panelcontrols and infotainment displayscreen.


Lighting 131

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is in thedoor position.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in theheadliner.

* (Dome Lamp Override) : Pressto turn the lamps off, even when adoor is open.

I (Door) : Press to turn the lampson automatically when a door isopened.

+ (On) : Press to turn on the domelamps.

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are in theoverhead console.

m orn (Reading Lamps) : Pressthe button near each lamp to turn iton or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, back-up lamps, and mostof the interior lamps turn on brieflyat night or in areas of limited lightingwhen K is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.After about 30 seconds the exteriorlamps turn off, and then the domeand remaining interior lamps will dimto off. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization 0 121.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, back-uplamps, parking lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.The dome lamps also come on


132 Lighting

when the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lamps anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

If equipped with Keyless Access,the exterior lamps and dome lampsautomatically turn on when thedriver door is opened after theignition is turned off. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) 0 180 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 182.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 121.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If some interior lamps are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off, if the parking lamps orheadlamps have been manually lefton. This protects against drainingthe battery. To restart the 10-minutetimer, turn the exterior lamp controlto the O position and then back to

the; or2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START position.


Infotainment System 133

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . 134Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 143Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 144

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . . 148Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:

. Become familiar with theoperation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.


134 Infotainment System

For more information, see DefensiveDriving 0 170.

Caution

Contact your dealer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere with theoperation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 187.

The vehicle may have a base radio,which is included in this manual.See the infotainment manual forinformation on the connective radioand the navigation system, audioplayers, phone, and voicerecognition. There is alsoinformation on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.



Overview

1. O (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.

2. Buttons 1–6

. Radio: Saves and selectsfavorite stations.

3. g (Previous/Reverse)

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

4. k (Play/Pause)

. CD: Pauses playback, andstops playback.

5. l (Next/Fast Forward)

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD: Selects the next trackor fast forwards within atrack.

6. CLOCK

. Opens the clock menu.

7. INFO (Information)

. Radio: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

8. TONE

. Opens the tone menu.

9. AS (Autostore)

. Radio: Opens the autostorestations list.



10. Y (Eject)

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

11. MENU/SEL

. Turn to open menus,highlight menu items, or setnumeric values while ina menu.

. Press to select menu items.

. Radio: Manually selectsradio stations.

. CD: Selects tracks.

12. BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

13. FAV (Favorite Pages)

. Radio: Opens thefavorites list.

14. 5 \ > (Phone/Mute)

. Opens the phonemain menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

15. CONFIG (Configure)

. Opens the settings menu.

16. CD Slot

. Insert a CD.

17. CD/AUX

. Selects the CD player or anexternal audio source.

18. BAND

. Changes the band whilelistening to the radio.

. Selects the radio whenlistening to a different audiosource.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

O (Power/Volume) : Press to turnthe system on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

O (Power/Volume) : Turn to adjustthe volume.

5 / > (Phone/Mute) : Press tomute the infotainment system. Press5 / > again, or turn the O knob tocancel mute.

Menu System

The menu system appears on thedisplay screen.

Controls

The MENU/SEL knob and the BACKbutton are used to navigate themenu system.

MENU/SEL Knob : Press to:

. Enter the menu system.

. Select or activate the highlightedmenu option.

. Confirm a set value.



. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:

. Highlight a menu option.

. Select a value.

BACK : Press to:

. Exit a menu.

. Return from a submenu screento the previous menu screen.

. Delete the last character in asequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU/SEL knob toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the MENU/SEL knob toconfirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the MENU/SEL knob toturn the function on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the character.



Press the BACK button to delete thelast character in the sequence orpress and hold to delete the entirecharacter sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the MENU/SELknob until the value changesto 0.

Press the BACK button to go backto the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

If equipped with an equalizer:


2. Select EQ presets.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press the BACK button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.





3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

BAND : Press to turn the radio onand choose between AM, FM, andSiriusXM®, if equipped.

MENU/SEL : Turn to navigate theavailable menus and to search forstations.

INFO : Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

g orl : Press to search forstations.

FAV : Press to open the favoriteslist and select the favorites page.

1 to 6 : Press to select presetstations.

AS (Autostore) : Press to open theautostore list.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the BAND button to chooseAM, FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped.The last station that was playingstarts playing again.



Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly pressg orl toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holdg orl until thestation on the display is reached,then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to selectthe frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List.All receivable stations in thecurrent reception area aredisplayed. If a station list hasnot been created, an automaticstation search is done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A listof all programming typesavailable displays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updated whenthe station lists are updated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FMStation List, if the stationsstored in the station list are nolonger received. A stationsearch will be completed andthe first station in the updatedlist will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe MENU/SEL knob.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.



Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.

Autostore Stations

AS (Autostore) : Autostoresearches and stores 12 FM and12 AM stations with the strongestsignal on two pages with sixstations stored on each page. Touse autostore:

1. Press BAND to select FMor AM.

2. Press and hold AS until a beepsounds. SEARCH displays onthe radio, followed by thenumber of stations found.

3. The radio will automaticallystore the 12 strongest stationsfound as autostore presets.

4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 toautostore stations on the otherradio band.

Press the AS button to alternatebetween the autostore pages 1 and2 of the selected radio band.

AS displays on the radio when usingautostore presets.

Autostore does not deletepreviously stored favorite stations.

Autostore does not function withSiriusXM radio stations.

Satellite RadioVehicles with a SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid SiriusXMSatellite Radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.


SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A service fee is required to receivethe SiriusXM service. If SiriusXMservice needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.For more information, contactSiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or1-866-635-2349 in the U.S.,or www.xmradio.ca or1-877-209-0079 in Canada.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theSiriusXM radio are:

BAND : Press to turn the radio onand choose between AM, FM, andSiriusXM.

g orl : Press to go to theprevious or next channel.

FAV : Press to open thefavorites list.

1 to 6 : Press to select a favorite.

MENU/SEL : Turn to select achannel.

INFO : Press to display additionalinformation that may be availableabout the current song.



k (Play/Pause) : Press to pausetime shifted content, if equipped.

Selecting the SiriusXM Band

Press the BAND button to choosebetween the AM, FM, and SiriusXMbands. The last channel played inthat band begins to play when thatband is selected.

SiriusXM Categories

SiriusXM channels are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby usingg orl , or the MENU/SEL knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the category.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toremove or add the category.

Selecting a SiriusXM Channel

SiriusXM channels can be selectedby usingg,l , the MENU/SELknob, or the Menu system.

Selecting a Channel Usinggorl

. Press and releaseg orl togo to the previous or nextchannel.

. Press and holdg orl toscroll through the previous ornext channel until the channel isreached.

Selecting a Channel Using theMENU/SEL Knob

To select a SiriusXM channel usingthe MENU/SEL knob:

Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight a SiriusXM channel. Thechannel is selected after a shortdelay.

To select a channel using theMENU/SEL knob:

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob andselect Channel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theMenu System


2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.

Storing a SiriusXM Channel asa Favorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a position inthe list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button until thechannel can be heard again.



Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can also occurwhen things like storms and powerlines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing thetreble on the radio.


If equipped, SiriusXM SatelliteRadio Service provides digital radioreception. Tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.

Cell Phone Usage

Cell phone usage, such as makingor receiving phone calls, charging,or just having the phone on maycause static interference in theradio. Unplug the phone or turn it offif this happens.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe SiriusXM Satellite Radioantenna is located on the roof of thevehicle. Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the SiriusXM systemmay be affected if the sunroofis open.



Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,the SiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the features listedabove may be affected if thesunroof is open.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint-free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solution

mixed with water, and clean it. Wipethe disc from the center to theouter edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD player.If a label is needed, label the top ofthe recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Caution

If a label is added to a CD, morethan one CD is inserted into theslot at a time, or an attempt ismade to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.



Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD/AUX : Press to use the CDplayer.

l org : Press to select tracks orto fast forward or rewind within atrack.

INFO : Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.

MENU/SEL : Turn to enterthe menu.

Y : Press to eject the disc.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressY.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD/AUX button if there isa disc in the player; it beginsplaying.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg orl to select theprevious or next track.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the MENU/SEL knob and thenset Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl org to fastforward or rewind within the currenttrack.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg orl to select theprevious or next track.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Genres

. Folder View



To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Auxiliary DevicesIf equipped, the AUX inputs are inthe center console and allowportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary jack or USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation 0 136.

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.

. iPods

. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs)

. USB Drives

. Zunes®

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system. Devices arealso charged while plugged into theUSB port.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks that are found can besearched for by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Podcasts

. Genres

. Audio Books

. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Podcasts,Genres, Audio Books,or Composers.




Shuffle

Turn the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press the BACK button toreturn to the main screen.

On : Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off : Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press theBACK button to return to the mainscreen.

On : Repeats the current track.

Off : Starts playback from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Podcasts

. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On : Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off : Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On : Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off : Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 10,000 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.




It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:

. Playlists*

. Artists

. Albums

. Song Titles

. Genres

. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On : Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off : Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On : Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off : Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:

. Placement and receipt of calls ina hands-free mode.

. Sharing of the cell phone’saddress book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:

. Become familiar with thefeatures of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voice

recognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (End Call/Mute) : Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.See OnStar Overview 0 334.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls. SeeOperation 0 136.

5 \ > (Phone/Mute) : Press toenter the Phone main menu. Pressto mute the audio system.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise : The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak : A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak : Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.



Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/ O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

See Radio Frequency Statement0 331.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operation0 136.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions before

pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See Operation0 136.

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first paired

to the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display. ThePIN is used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. Afterthe PIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will be



used to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle. The systemresponds with “<Phone name>has been successfully paired”after the pairing process iscomplete.

7. Repeat Steps 1–6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone phonemanufacturer's user guide or

contact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press 5 \ > once or twice(depending on the radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the MENU/SEL knobto scroll through the entire listof names/numbers in thephone book.



4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation 0 136.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELknob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELknob to decline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELknob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELknob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Enteringa Character Sequence” inOperation 0 136.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU/SELknob and choose Merge Calls.



5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeatSteps 1–4. The number ofcallers that can be added islimited by your wireless servicecarrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the MENU/SELknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation 0 136.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button on the steering wheel.Use the commands below for thevarious voice features. Foradditional information, say “Help”while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See Operation0 136.

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.



Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The systemresponds with instructions anda four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want topair. For help with this process,see your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. Afterthe PIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle. The system

responds with “<Phone name>has been successfully paired”after the pairing process iscomplete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”

. If another cell phone isfound, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store : This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store : This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete : This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags : Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number orgroup of numbers you want tostore all at once with nopauses, then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow the

directions given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”



Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call : The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial : This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency



3. Say “911.”


Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command




2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”The system dials the lastnumber called from theconnected cell phone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call commandto dial the number of the thirdparty to be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audio



does not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Storing andDeleting Phone Numbers.”

Trademarks andLicense AgreementsThe Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS Inc. AllRights Reserved.



Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

“Made for iPod and iPhone” meansthat an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connectspecifically to iPod and has beencertified by the developer to meetApple performance standards.

iPod is a trademark of AppleComputer, Inc., registered in theU.S. and other countries.

Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. XM® serviceonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada*.

*Canada — Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extremenorthern latitudes. This is beyondthe control of SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio. Explicit Language Notice —Channels with frequent explicitlanguage are indicated with an “XL”preceding the channel name.Channel blocking is available forSiriusXM Satellite Radio receiversby notifying SiriusXM at:

. USA Customers — Seewww.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349.

. Canadian Customers — Seewww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio System or thatsupport the SiriusXM website, theOnline Service or any of its content.Furthermore, the AMBER voicecompression software included inthis product is protected byintellectual property rights includingpatent rights, copyrights, and tradesecrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement fromSiriusXM® is required for anyproduct that incorporatesSiriusXM Technology and/or foruse of any of the SiriusXM



marks to be manufactured,distributed or marketed in theSiriusXM Service Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed and/or sold inCanada, a separate agreementis required with CanadianSatellite Radio Inc. (operatingas XM Canada).

Music and video recognitiontechnology and related data areprovided by Gracenote®. Gracenoteis the industry standard in musicrecognition technology and relatedcontent delivery. For moreinformation, visitwww.gracenote.com.

CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and musicand video-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 topresent Gracenote. One or morepatents owned by Gracenote apply

to this product and service. See theGracenote website for anon-exhaustive list of applicableGracenote patents. Gracenote andCDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, theGracenote logo and logotype, andthe “Powered by Gracenote” logoare either registered trademarks ortrademarks of Gracenote in theUnited States and/or othercountries.

If you require more informationregarding the use of the GracenoteService, visit: www.gracenote.com/corporate.

For the data provided byGracenote® Music RecognitionService, the content is notnecessarily guaranteed 100%.

Regarding the use of GracenoteMusic Recognition Service, whenthis product is used, it is necessaryto agree to the following articles.

Gracenote® End User License

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the

“Gracenote Software”) enables thisapplication to perform disc and/orfile identification and obtainmusic-related information, includingname, artist, track, and titleinformation (“Gracenote Data”) fromonline servers or embeddeddatabases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform otherfunctions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intendedEnd-User functions of thisapplication or device. You agree thatyou will use Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personalnon-commercial use only. You agreenot to assign, copy, transfer ortransmit the Gracenote Software orany Gracenote Data to any thirdparty.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN. You agree that yournon-exclusive license to use theGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Servers



will terminate if you violate theserestrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease anyand all use of the Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves all rights inGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the GracenoteServers, including all ownershiprights.

Under no circumstances willGracenote become liable for anypayment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce itsrights under this Agreement againstyou directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses aunique identifier to track queries forstatistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is toallow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowinganything about who you are. Formore information, see the web pagefor the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Datafrom in the Gracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves the right todelete data from the GracenoteServers or to change datacategories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient.

No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or thatfunctioning of Gracenote Softwareor Gracenote Servers will beuninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced oradditional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue itsservices at any time.

Gracenote disclaims all warrantiesexpress or implied, including, butnot limited to, implied warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for aparticular purpose, title, and

non-infringement. Gracenote doesnot warrant the results that will beobtained by your use of theGracenote software or anyGracenote server. In no case willGracenote be liable for anyconsequential or incidentaldamages or for any lost profits orlost revenues.


162 Climate Controls

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . 162Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Climate ControlSystemsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, andventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with these systems.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning



3. Floor Air Mode

4. Vent Air Mode

5. Fan Control


7. Defrost

8. Defog


Vehicles with Air Conditioning



3. Floor Air Mode

4. Vent Air Mode

5. Fan Control


7. Defrost

8. Air Conditioning


Climate Controls 163

9. Defog

10. Recirculation


9 (Fan Control) : Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control : Turn toincrease or decrease thetemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Tochange the current mode, press oneof the following:

F (Vent) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-level) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog) : Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost) : Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning, IfEquipped) : Press to turn the airconditioning on or off. If the fan isturned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning compressor willnot work.

h (Recirculation, If Equipped) :Press to turn on the recirculation.An indicator light comes on. Air isrecirculated inside the vehicle.It helps to quickly cool the air insidethe vehicle and reduce the entry ofoutside air and odors.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Pressh toselect recirculation; press it again toselect outside air.

Rear Window Defogger

1 (Rear Defogger) : Press to turnthe rear window defogger on or off.An indicator light on the buttoncomes on to show that the rearwindow defogger is on.

The defogger only works when theignition is in ON/RUN. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

If equipped with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger button ison and help to clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirrors. SeeHeated Mirrors 0 41.

Caution

Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow. Do not adhere anythingto the defogger grid lines in therear glass. These actions may

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

damage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Heated Seats (If Equipped) : Pressto turn the heated seats on or off.See Heated Front Seats 0 49

Automatic ClimateControl SystemIf equipped, the heating, cooling,and ventilation for the vehicle canbe controlled with this system.



3. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

4. Defrost

5. Fan Control


7. Air Conditioning

8. MODE (Air Delivery Mode)

9. Recirculation

10. Power

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Pressh toselect recirculation; press it again toselect outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 110.

Manual Operation

O (Power) : Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.

Fan Control : Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.The selected fan speed is indicated



by a number on the display screen.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

MODE (Air Delivery Mode) : Pressto change the direction of theairflow. The current mode appearsin the display screen. Automaticoperation is canceled and manualmode is initiated. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-level) : Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

C (Tri-Level) : Air is dividedbetween the windshield, instrumentpanel, and floor outlets.

[ (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog) : Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost) : Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

# (Air Conditioning) : Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioningcompressor will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

h (Recirculation) : Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleand reduce the entry of outside airand odors.

Automatic Air Recirculation :When the AUTO indicator light ison, the air is automaticallyrecirculated as needed to helpquickly cool the inside of thevehicle.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization0 121.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The defogger only works when theignition is in ON/RUN. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. See“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization 0 121.



When Auto Rear Defog is selected,the rear window defogger turns onautomatically when the interiortemperature is cold and the outsidetemperature is about 5 °C (40 °F)and below. The auto rear defoggerturns off automatically. At higherspeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.

If equipped with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger button ison and help to clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirrors. SeeHeated Mirrors 0 41.

Caution

Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of thefront windshield and rear windowwith a razor blade or anythingelse that is sharp. This maydamage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect theradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Heated Seats (If Equipped) : Pressto turn the heated seats on or off.See Heated Front Seats 0 49.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped, the climatecontrol system may run. The driver’sprevious settings are used to heator cool the vehicle. During extremecold temperatures, for manualoperation, set the temperaturecontrol to high heat and the fancontrol to medium speed instead ofhigh for better results. The reardefog and front heated seats maycome on if it is cold outside. Theindicators do not come on. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 32 andHeated Front Seats 0 49.

Sensors

The solar sensor, on top of theinstrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.



Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel.

Move the slats (1) to change thedirection of the airflow.

Use the thumbwheels (2) near theair vents to open or close off theairflow.

Additional air vents are locatedbeneath the windshield, driver andpassenger side door windows, andin the footwells. These are fixed andcannot be adjusted.

Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule 0 305.

See your dealer regardingreplacement of the filter.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerants



directly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


Driving and Operating 169

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 171Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 172Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 173Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 174Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 175Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 180Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 184Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 188Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 191Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 195

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Driver Assistance SystemsRear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . 202Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 209Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Trailer TowingGeneral Towing Information . . . 211Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Trailer Towing (Fuel EconomyModel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Trailer Towing (Except FuelEconomy Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216


170 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts0 52.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.



Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.

Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering, it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.



See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Vehicle Messages0 114.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.



The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.

Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 253.

. Turn off cruise control.



Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 198.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops, but thebrakes should be applied soonerthan when on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 196.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwise



clear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stay with the vehicle unless there ishelp nearby. If possible, useRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 325. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust contains

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

carbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and setthe fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 190.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 198.



{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directions

causes a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 291.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the original

equipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires 0 253 and TirePressure 0 260.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It may show the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.



6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing (Except FuelEconomy Model) 0 214 or TrailerTowing (Fuel Economy Model)0 214 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg (150 lbs)× 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg (150 lbs)× 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight= 113 kg (250 lbs).



Example 3


2. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 91 kg(200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight= 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelmay show the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unlessneeded.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

The vehicle may be equipped withan electronic keyless ignition withpushbutton start.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the Keyless Accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 26.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF (NoIndicator Lights) : When thevehicle is stopped, press theENGINE START/STOP button onceto turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 187.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will displaythe message SHIFT TO PARK inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Transmission Messages 0 120.



When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willswitch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 197.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for longer thantwo seconds, or press twice infive seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light) : This mode allowsyou to use some electricalaccessories when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine 0 184. Theignition will then remain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Press thebutton again to turn the vehicle off.



Ignition Positions (KeyAccess)

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF) : When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 187.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe ignition and automatictransmission. The steering wheelmay also lock, if equipped.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to Neutral.This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto Neutral, continue to firmlyapply the brakes and steer thevehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 197.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steering

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

systems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe steering wheel and ignition. Tomove the key from ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, pushin the key and then turn it toLOCK/OFF.

2 (ON/RUN) : The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including theventilation fan and 12-volt poweroutlet, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights. Thisposition can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and to

verify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

3 (START) : This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition.

If the ignition becomes difficult toturn, see Keys 0 24.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.The key lock release is designed toprevent ignition key removal unlessthe shift lever is in P (Park).

The key lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery. If the vehicle has anuncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See JumpStarting - North America 0 288.



If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert aflat bladed tool or another key fromthe key chain into the opening.When the lever can be felt, actuatethe lever toward the driver, andremove the key from the ignition.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 216.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). To restart the vehiclewhen it is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in Neutraland the parking brake engaged.Hold the clutch pedal down to thefloor and start the engine.

Engine Starting Procedure (KeyAccess)

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of thekey. The idle speed will godown as the engine warms. Donot race the engineimmediately after starting it.Allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Push the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floorand hold it there as you holdthe key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Waitat least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the crankingmotor to cool. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again,repeat the procedure. This



clears the extra gasoline fromthe engine. Do not race theengine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently untilthe oil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Engine Starting Procedure(Keyless Access)

1. With the Keyless Accesssystem, the RKE transmittermust be in the vehicle. Pressthe ENGINE START/STOPbutton with the brake pedalapplied. When the enginebegins cranking, let go of thebutton.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or the RKEbattery is low, a DriverInformation Center (DIC)

message will display. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 110 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation0 26.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou press the ENGINE START/STOP button, for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Waitat least 15 seconds between

each try, to allow the crankingmotor to cool down. When theengine starts, let go of thebutton, and the accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Donot race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater, if equipped, canhelp in cold weather conditions at orbelow −18 °C (0 °F) for easierstarting and better fuel economyduring engine warm-up. Plug in theheater at least four hours beforestarting the vehicle. An internalthermostat in the plug end of theengine’s cord will prevent engineheater operation at temperaturesabove −18 °C (0 °F).



To Use the Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L Similar

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The electricalcord is located on thepassenger side of the enginecompartment, behind the aircleaner.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detectionfunction. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could make

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

it overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to thevehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep it



away from moving engineparts. If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows

. Sunroof

The power windows and sunroof willcontinue to work for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened. The radio will work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the radio will continue to work for

10 minutes, or until the driver door isopened or the key is removed fromthe ignition.

Shifting Into ParkUse this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake 0 197 formore information.

2. Hold the button on the shiftlever and push the lever towardthe front of the vehicle intoP (Park).


Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 187.If you are towing a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 211.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).



Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. The shift lock isdesigned to:

. Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park) unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 288

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If the shift lever still cannot bemoved from P (Park), see “ShiftLock Manual Release.”

This vehicle may have the SafetyBelt Assurance System, which mayprevent the vehicle from shifting outof P (Park). See Safety BeltMessages 0 118.

Shift Lock Manual Release

The automatic transmission has anelectric park lock. The key must bein the ON/RUN position, and thebrake pedal pressed so the shiftlever can be moved from theP (Park) position. If the battery haslost power, the shift lever cannot bemoved from P (Park) unless the shiftlock manual release is disengagedmanually.

To access the shift lock manualrelease:

1. Apply the parking brake.



2. Open the cover to the right ofthe shift lever.

3. Insert a tool into the opening asfar as it will go and move theshift lever out of P (Park) at thesame time. If P (Park) isselected again, the shift leverwill be locked again. Have thecause of the problem fixed byyour dealer.

4. Close the cover.

ParkingIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before getting out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse), and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift leverhas been placed into R (Reverse)with the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF, andrelease the clutch.

If parking on a hill, or if the vehicleis pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 211.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 187 andEngine Exhaust 0 190. If the vehiclehas a manual transmission, seeParking 0 189.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 211.



AutomaticTransmission

The selected gear is also shown inthe instrument cluster.

P : This position locks the drivewheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

could be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 187 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 211.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park 0 188.

R : Use this gear to back up.



Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 175.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicleis already moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

The vehicle has an automaticneutral shift feature which allows thetransmission to automatically shift toN (Neutral) when the vehicle isstopped with a forward gearengaged. The reduced load on theengine improves vehicle fueleconomy.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If more power is neededfor passing, and the vehicle is:

. Going less than 56 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Caution

If the vehicle accelerates slowly,or does not shift gears, thetransmission could be damaged.Have the vehicle servicedright away.



Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

All Models Except Fuel EconomyModel

Caution

Driving with the engine at a highrpm without upshifting while usingDriver Shift Control (DSC), coulddamage the vehicle. Alwaysupshift when necessary whileusing DSC.

DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similar to amanual transmission.

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into the (+)or (−) manual position.

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift. An M and thecurrent gear will be displayedin the DIC.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. Use DSC for sport drivingor when climbing or descendinghills, to stay in gear longer, or todownshift for more power or enginebraking.

The transmission will only allowshifting into gears appropriate forvehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine rpm is too high, nor to thenext higher gear when the maximumengine rpm is reached.

If shifting is prevented for anyreason, the currently selected gearwill flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has not shiftedgears.



While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear allows thevehicle to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

Fuel Economy Model

Caution

If the vehicle is driven at a highrpm without upshifting while usingElectronic Range Select (ERS),the vehicle could be damaged.Always upshift when necessarywhile using ERS.

ERS allows for the selection of therange of gear positions. Use thismode when driving downhill ortowing a trailer to limit the top gear

and vehicle speed. The shiftposition indicator within the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will displaya number next to the M indicatingthe highest available gear undermanual mode and the drivingconditions when manual mode wasselected.

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into the (+)or (−) manual position.

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift. An M and thecurrent gear will be displayedin the DIC.

When shifting to M (Manual Mode),the transmission will shift to therange of the current gear. For thisrange, the highest gear available isdisplayed next to the M in the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 110 for more information. All gearsbelow that number are available touse. For example, when 4 (Fourth)is shown next to the M, 1 (First)through 4 (Fourth) gears are shiftedautomatically. To shift to 5 (Fifth)

gear, press the shift leverforward (+) to upshift or shift intoD (Drive).

M (Manual Mode) will preventshifting to a lower gear range if theengine speed is too high. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. Slow thevehicle, then press the shift leverrearward (−) to downshift to thedesired lower gear range.

While using the ERS, cruise controlcan be used.



Manual TransmissionShift Pattern

All ModelsExcept Fuel

Economy Model

Fuel EconomyModel

These are the shift patterns for the6-speed manual transmissions.

To operate the transmissions:

Caution

Do not rest your hand on the shiftlever while driving. The pressurecould cause premature wear inthe transmission. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving or whilestopped. The pressure can causepremature wear in the clutch. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

1 (First) : Press the clutch pedalfully to the pedal stop and shift into1 (First). Then slowly let up on theclutch pedal as the acceleratorpedal is pressed.

If the vehicle comes to a completestop and it is hard to shift into1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutraland let up on the clutch. Press theclutch pedal back down. Then shiftinto 1 (First).

2 (Second) : Press the clutch pedalfully to the pedal stop while lettingup on the accelerator pedal andshifting into 2 (Second). Then,slowly let up on the clutch pedal asthe accelerator pedal is pressed.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and6 (Sixth) : Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) thesame way as for 2 (Second). Slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as theaccelerator pedal Is pressed.

For the best fuel economy, use6 (Sixth) gear whenever vehiclespeed and driving conditions allow.

An up-shift light in the instrumentcluster indicates when to shift to thenext higher gear for the best fueleconomy.

During normal driving, upshiftsshould occur between 1300 and2500 rpm, and downshifts shouldoccur between 1500 and 1000 rpm.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.



Neutral : Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine. Theshift lever is in Neutral when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

R (Reverse) : To back up, with thevehicle at a complete stop, pressdown the clutch pedal. Then pull upthe ring on the shift lever, and shiftinto R (Reverse). Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressingthe accelerator pedal.

If the gear does not engage, shiftthe transmission to Neutral, releasethe clutch pedal, and press it backdown. Repeat the gear selection.

{ Warning

If you skip a gear whendownshifting, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. You couldinjure yourself or others. Do notshift down more than one gear ata time when downshifting.

Caution

Do not skip gears whileupshifting. This can causepremature wear in thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 105.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to



avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull upon the parking brake handle. It isnot necessary to push in on therelease button while applying theparking brake. If the ignition is in theON/RUN position, the brake systemwarning light will come on. SeeBrake System Warning Light 0 104.

To release the parking brake:

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Pull the parking brake handleup until you can press therelease button.

3. Hold the release button in asyou move the brake handle allthe way down.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.



Driving with the parking brakeapplied will cause a warning chimeto sound and the RELEASEPARKING BRAKE message toappear in the DIC. The message willremain on until the parking brake isreleased or the vehicle is stopped.

If parking on a hill, or if the vehicleis pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 211.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.

Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the



vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 175and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC),and d comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the center console, beside theshift lever.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.



To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displays in the instrumentcluster. To turn TCS on again, pressand release the g button. The

traction off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the traction off light i and

StabiliTrak OFF light g come onand stay on in the instrumentcluster. To turn TCS and StabiliTrakon again, press and release the gbutton. The traction off light i and

StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 219.

Cruise ControlIf equipped with cruise control, thevehicle can maintain a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or morewithout keeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 40 km/h(25 mph).

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak systemthat begins to limit wheel spin whileusing cruise control and the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 198. When roadconditions allow you to safely use itagain, the cruise control can beturned on.

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

1 (On/Off) : Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.A white indicator comes on in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate) : Ifthere is a set speed in memory,move the thumbwheel up briefly to



resume to that speed or holdupward to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET/− (Set/Coast) : Move thethumbwheel down briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease speed.

* (Cancel) : Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If* is on when not in use, SET/- orRES/+ could get bumped and gointo cruise when not desired. Keep* off when cruise control is notbeing used.

1. Press 1 to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Move the thumbwheel downand release it.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 98.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesor clutch for manual transmissionsare applied or* is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Move the thumbwheel up towardRES/+ and hold it until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 110. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Move the thumbwheel towardSET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, move thethumbwheel toward SET/−briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.



The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 110. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previousset cruise control speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflymoving the thumbwheel towardSET/− will result in cruise control setto the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well cruise control works onhills depends on the vehicle speed,load, and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, youmight have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep your

speed down. If the brake pedal isapplied, cruise control willdisengage.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedalor clutch for a manualtransmission.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press 1.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 1 is pressedor if the ignition is turned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC system canassist the driver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle.

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.



An image appears on theinfotainment screen when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The infotainment screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To return to the previous screensooner, do one of the following:

. Press a hard key on theinfotainment system.

. Shift into P (Park).

Symbols and Guidelines

The system may have a feature thatlets the driver view caution symbolson the infotainment screen whileusing the RVC. The Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.The error message Rear ParkingAssist Symbols Unavailable maydisplay if RPA has been disabledand the symbols have beenturned on.

The symbols appear and may coveran object when viewing theinfotainment screen when an objectis detected by the RPA system.

The RVC system may also have aguideline overlay that can help thedriver align the vehicle whenbacking into a parking spot.

To turn the symbols or guidelines onor off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the CONFIG button toenter the configure menuoptions.

3. Select Display.

4. Select Rear Camera Options.

5. Select Symbols or Guidelines.When a checkmark appearsnext to the feature, it isturned on.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

On vehicles with the RCTA, awarning triangle with a left or rightpointing arrow may also display onthe RVC screen to warn of trafficcoming from the left or the right.Three beeps will also sound fromthe left or right, depending on thedirection of the detected vehicle.This system detects objects comingfrom up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left

or right side behind the vehicle. TheRCTA system will not work properlyif ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the rear bumpersensors.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of your vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

RCTA can be turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. See“Collision Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 121.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM : This message candisplay when the system is notoperating properly.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.



Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited. It does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper and can varydepending on vehicle orientation orroad conditions. Displayed imagesmay be closer or farther than theyappear.

The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

1. View displayed by thecamera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps are shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

Parking AssistIf equipped, the Rear Parking Assist(RPA) system assists the driver withparking and avoiding objects whilein R (Reverse). RPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).



The sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground. Thedistance objects can be detectedmay be less during warmer or humidweather.

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with parking assist,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.

How the System Works

RPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.

An obstacle detection is indicatedby beeps. The time between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in), the beeping is acontinuous beep for five seconds.

Turning the System On and Off

The RPA system can be turned onand off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization 0 121.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

RPA defaults to the on setting eachtime the vehicle is started.

Turn off RPA when towing a trailer.


The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST : Ifthis message occurs, check thefollowing conditions:

. The sensors are not clean. Keepthe vehicle's rear bumper free ofmud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush.For cleaning instructions, seeExterior Care 0 294.

. The parking assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

If the above conditions do not exist,take the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.



PARK ASSIST OFF : If the RPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:

. The driver has disabled thesystem.

. An object was hanging out of thetrunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed,RPA will return to normaloperation.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas. The

SBZA warning display will light up inthe corresponding outside sidemirror and will flash if the turn signalis on.

{ Warning

SBZA does not alert the driver tovehicles rapidly approachingoutside of the side blind zones,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. It may not providealerts when changing lanes underall driving conditions. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Beforemaking a lane change, alwayscheck mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turnsignals.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Thiszone starts at approximately themiddle of the vehicle and goes back5 m (16 ft).

How the System Works

The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blindzone. This indicates it may be



unsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check theSBZA display, check mirrors, glanceover your shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right side mirror display will lightup if a moving vehicle is detected inthat blind zone. If the turn signal isactivated in the same direction of adetected vehicle, this display willflash as an extra warning not tochange lanes.

SBZA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See“Collision Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 121.

If SBZA is disabled by the driver,the SBZA mirror displays will notlight up.


SBZA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The SBZA detection zonesthat extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. SBZA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

SBZA may not always alert thedriver to vehicles in the side blindzone, especially in wet conditions.The system does not need to beserviced. The system may light updue to guardrails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other non-movingobjects. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Care0 294. If the DIC displays thesystem unavailable message aftercleaning both sides of the vehicletoward the rear corners of thevehicle, see your dealer.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the blind zoneand the system is clean, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, the Side Blind Zone Alert Onoption will not be available on thepersonalization menu.

Radio Frequency Information




FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. Do not use gasoline with an

octane rating below 87, as it maycause engine damage and will lowerfuel economy.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 102.If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer for diagnosis. If itis determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any otherfuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel 0 208.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not use a cell phonewhile refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noiseto stop then unscrew thecap all the way.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger side of thevehicle. To open the fuel door, pushand release the rearward centeredge of the door.

Turn the fuel cap counterclockwiseto remove. Reinstall the cap byturning it clockwise until it clicks.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

If the cap is not properly installed,the malfunction indicator lamp willcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 102.

Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 294.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 102.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside thefill opening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, lightmatches, or use lighterswhile pumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 291. Fortowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 291.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.



. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500mi), to preventdamage to the engine, axle orother parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 mi) trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow in D(Drive) but M (Manual Mode) isrecommended. See ManualMode 0 193. Use a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too often.For vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is better not touse the highest gear.

. Turn off Parking Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

When towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.


. Also adjust the ClimateControl system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For information about carbonmonoxide, see Engine Exhaust0 190.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.



Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument cluster flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument cluster flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, the

brakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 234.



Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park) for vehicles

with an automatic transmissionor into reverse gear forvehicles with a manualtransmission.

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:

. Start the engine.

. Shift into a gear.

. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule 0 305.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axle

lubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 234.

Trailer Towing (FuelEconomy Model)The vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Trailer Towing (ExceptFuel Economy Model)Before pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:

. The weight of the trailer.

. The weight of the trailer tongue.

. The total weight on yourvehicle's tires.



Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lb). But even that canbe too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 176.

The trailer tongue (1) should weigh10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.



Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 176. Make sure not to go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.

. The rear bumper on the vehicleis not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,seal the holes when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadly

carbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust 0 190.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well orat all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light)0 102. A device connected to theData Link Connector (DLC)—such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device—may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.



Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 69 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 69.


218 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 219California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 219

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 227Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Manual Transmission Fluid . . . 229Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 229Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 234Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Battery - North America . . . . . . 239Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 239Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 240

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 241

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Headlamps, Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . 242

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 246Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 247Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 248Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 255Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 271Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 272


Vehicle Care 219

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 287

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 291Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningWARNING: Most motor vehicles,including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive

harm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals.

See Battery - North America 0 239and Jump Starting - North America0 288.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as


220 Vehicle Care

airbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 69.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information0 330.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 69.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 316.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:


Vehicle Care 221

1. Pull up on the hood releasehandle. It is located inside thevehicle to the left of thesteering column.

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand push the secondary hoodrelease handle toward thedriver side of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood and release thehood prop from its retainer,located above the radiator.Securely place the hood propinto the slot on the underside ofthe hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, besure all the filler caps are onproperly. Then, lift the hood torelieve pressure on the hoodprop. Remove the hood propfrom the slot on the undersideof the hood and return the propto its retainer. The prop rod

must click into place whenreturning it to the retainer toprevent hood damage.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and releaseit so it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


222 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

1.4L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 223

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 229.

2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 225.

3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 231.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See“When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil 0 225.

5. Remote Negative (-)Grounding Point. See JumpStarting - North America0 288.

6. Brake/Clutch FluidReservoir. See Brake Fluid0 238 and Hydraulic Clutch0 229.

7. Battery - North America0 239.

8. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. SeeEngine Coolant 0 231.

9. Remote Positive (+)Terminal. See Jump Starting- North America 0 288.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 248.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” underWasher Fluid 0 236.


224 Vehicle Care

1.8L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 225

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 229.

2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 225.

3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 231.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See“When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil 0 225.

5. Remote Negative (-)Grounding Point. See JumpStarting - North America0 288.

6. Brake/Clutch FluidReservoir. See Brake Fluid0 238 and Hydraulic Clutch0 229.

7. Battery - North America0 239.

8. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System 0 231.

9. Remote Positive (+)Terminal. See Jump Starting- North America 0 288.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 248.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” underWasher Fluid 0 236.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Always use engine oil approvedto the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 227.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overview0 222 for the location of the engineoil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


226 Vehicle Care

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel orcloth, then push it back in allthe way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 318.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 222 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 314.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.

Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 227

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the

trash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON DIC message comes on.See Engine Oil Messages 0 116.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil life


228 Vehicle Care

system might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Using the DIC MENU buttonand thumbwheel, scroll untilyou reach REMAINING OILLIFE on the DIC (: % forCanada).

2. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%. Whenprompted, use the thumbwheelto highlight YES or NO. Pressthe SET/CLR button to confirm.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONDIC message comes back on whenthe vehicle is started, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

The vehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 305, and be sure to use the fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 314.


Vehicle Care 229

Manual TransmissionFluid

How to Check ManualTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 314 for theproper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchFor vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is not necessary toregularly check brake/clutch fluidunless there is a leak suspected.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The brake/hydraulic clutch fluidreservoir cap has either a symbol ortext specifying the type of brakefluid. The common brake/clutch fluidreservoir is filled with GM approvedDOT 3 brake fluid as indicated onthe reservoir cap. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 222 forreservoir location.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the brake/clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system shouldbe closed and sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top off the fluid level.Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 222 for location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filter, see Maintenance Schedule0 305.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine air


230 Vehicle Care

cleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loosedust and dirt. Inspect the engine aircleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1.4L L4 Engine

1.8L L4 Engine

1. Remove the six screws thatsecure the cover.

2. Lift off the cover.

3. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

4. Align the air cleaner/filtercorrectly.

5. Install the cover by lowering itover the air cleaner/filter andsecure with the six screws.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.


Vehicle Care 231

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4Engine Similar

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 234.


232 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 314.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,

or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at theindicated mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.See Engine Overheating 0 234.

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 222.


Vehicle Care 233

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visible butthe coolant level is not at theindicated level mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They are

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

under pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

overheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Caution

In cold weather, water can freezeand crack the engine, radiator,heater core, and other parts. Usethe recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.


234 Vehicle Care

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that tostop. This will allow anypressure still left to be ventedout the discharge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.


3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture to

the coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeatSteps 1-3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThere is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicleinstrument cluster to warn of engineoverheating. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 100.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 325.


Vehicle Care 235

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan is running. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode 0 236for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not be

too serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not come


236 Vehicle Care

back on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. See “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”following.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven to asafe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, a significant loss in powerand engine performance will benoticed. The temperature gauge will

indicate an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended distancesand/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should beavoided.

Caution

After driving in the overheatedengine protection operatingmode, the engine oil will beseverely degraded. Any repairsperformed before the engine iscool may cause engine damage.Allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. Repair thecause of coolant loss, change theoil, and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil 0 225.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fall

below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 222 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 237

Caution (Continued)

solution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in the

proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications 0 318.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,they do not have wear indicators,but if a rear brake rubbing noise isheard, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Rear brakedrums should be removed andinspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing.Drum brakes have an inspectionhole to inspect lining wear duringscheduled maintenance. When thefront brake pads are replaced, havethe rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakes


238 Vehicle Care

may not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 222 for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system. Have thebrake/clutch hydraulic systemfixed. With a leak, the brakes willnot work well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to alow level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light 0 104.

Brake fluid absorbs water over time.Replace brake fluid at the specifiedintervals to prevent increasedstopping distance. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 305.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 314.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper brake fluid.


Vehicle Care 239

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 219.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 288 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicleshould start only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.


240 Vehicle Care

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all theway to the floor. If the vehiclestarts when the clutch pedal isnot pushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with a key type ignition,while parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

. The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


Vehicle Care 241

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 305 formore information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For properwindshield wiper blade length andtype, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 315.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage that

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

occurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly (1)away from the windshield.

2. Lift up on the plastic latch (2) inthe middle of the wiper bladewhere the wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade (3) down towardthe windshield far enough torelease it from the J-hookedend of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow thewiper blade to touch thewindshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.


242 Vehicle Care

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs0 247.

For any bulb-changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

1. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp2. High-Beam Headlamp/

Low-Beam Headlampand DRL

High-Beam Headlamp/Low-Beam Headlamp and DRL

1. Open the hood. See Hood0 220.


Vehicle Care 243

2. For the driver side bulb,remove the windshield washerbottle filler neck by firmlypulling it straight up and out ofthe bottle.

3. Remove the connectorretaining tab (1).

4. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb (3) bypressing the connectorrelease (2) and pullingstraight back.

5. Remove the bulb (3) from theheadlamp assembly by turningcounterclockwise and pullingstraight back.

6. Install the new bulb in theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

7. Install the wiring harnessconnector to the bulb. Be surethe connector release (2) locksinto place.

8. Install the connectorretaining tab (1).

9. For the driver side, reinstall thewindshield washer bottle fillerneck by firmly pushing itstraight into the bottle. Ensurethat the filler neck clip engagesinto the underhood electricalcenter retainer.

Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood0 220.

2. For the driver side bulb,remove the windshield washerbottle filler neck by firmlypulling it straight up and out ofthe bottle.

3. Remove the parking/turn signallamp bulb socket from theheadlamp assembly by turningcounterclockwise.


244 Vehicle Care

4. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket.

5. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

6. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

7. For the driver side, reinstall thewindshield washer bottle fillerneck by firmly pushing itstraight into the bottle. Ensurethat the filler neck clip engagesinto the underhood electricalcenter retainer.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamps

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the trunk deck trimcover (1).

3. Remove the bulb socket (2) byturning counterclockwise andpulling straight out.


Vehicle Care 245

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket.

5. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

6. Install the bulb socket byturning clockwise.

7. Install the trunk deck trimcover.

1. Sidemarker Lamp2. Turn Signal Lamp3. Stoplamp/Taillamp4. Back-up Lamp

To replace any one of these bulbs:

Stoplamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal,Back-up, and RearSidemarker Lamp

1. Open the trunk.

2. Open the two screw covers.

3. Remove the two screws thatsecure the taillamp assembly.


246 Vehicle Care

4. Remove the taillamp assemblyby pulling it straight back.

5. Remove the bulb socket fromthe taillamp assembly byturning it counterclockwise.

6. Install a new bulb into the bulbsocket.

7. Install the bulb socket into thetaillamp assembly by turning itclockwise.

8. Install the taillamp assemblyand tighten the two screws.

9. Close the two screw covers.

License Plate LampTo replace the license platelamp bulb:

1. Remove the two screws fromthe license plate lampassembly.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp assembly down.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pullstraight out of the lampassembly.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the socket.

5. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

6. Install the bulb socket byturning clockwise into thelicense plate lamp assembly.

7. Replace the license plate lampassembly and tightien the twoscrews to secure.


Vehicle Care 247

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921K

Front and RearSidemarker

194

Front Parking/TurnSignal Lamp

7444NA

High‐Beam/Low‐Bean and DRLHeadlamp

H13LL

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

Rear TurnSignal Lamp

7443NA

Stoplamp/Taillamp 3057K LCP

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


248 Vehicle Care

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block 0 248 andInstrument Panel Fuse Block 0 251.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clips and swing it up.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.


Vehicle Care 249

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini Fuses Usage

1 TransmissionControl Module

2 Engine ControlModule

3 Not Used

Mini Fuses Usage

4 Canister VentSolenoid

5 Ignition

7 Not Used

8 Fuel Injection

9 Fuel Injection/Ignition System

Mini Fuses Usage

10 Engine ControlModule

11 Lambda Sensor

13 Canister VentSolenoid

14 Air Solenoid

15 Not Used

16 Ignition/Air QualitySensor/Aero-Shutter

17 Ignition/Airbag

18 Fuel Control Module

19 Not Used

20 Fuel Pump

23 Not Used

29 Not Used

30 Antilock BrakeSystem

31 Body ControlModule



250 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

33 Front Seat Heating

34 Sunroof (IfEquipped)

35 InfotainmentSystem/Amplifier

36 Not Used

37 High BeamRight Side

38 High Beam Left Side

39 Not Used

40 Not Used

46 Cooling Fan

47 Lambda Sensor

48 Fog Lights

49 Not Used

50 Not Used

51 Horn

52 MalfunctionIndicator Lamp

53 Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror

Mini Fuses Usage

54 Light Switch/LightControl

55 Mirror Folding

56 Windshield Washer

57 Not Used

58 Not Used

60 Heated Mirror

61 Heated Mirror

62 Air Conditioning

63 Rear WindowSensor

64 Automatic OccupantSense

65 Not Used

66 Not Used

67 Fuel System ControlModule

68 Not Used

69 Battery VoltageSensor

70 Not Used

Mini Fuses Usage

71 Not Used

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Front Wipers

12 Starter Solenoid

21 Rear PowerWindows

22 Not Used

24 Front PowerWindows

25 ElectronicVacuum Pump

26 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

27 Electronic KeySystem/PEPS

28 Rear WindowDefogger

41 Not Used

42 Cooling Fan K2

43 Not Used


Vehicle Care 251

J-CaseFuses

Usage

44 Not Used

45 Cooling Fan K1

59 SEC Air Pump

MicroRelays

Usage

1 A/C Clutch

2 Starter Solenoid

4 Front Wiper Speed

5 Front Wiper On

6 Air Solenoid

10 Cooling Fan K3

12 Cooling Fan K3

14 Not Used

U-MicroRelays

Usage

3 Cooling Fan K7

8 Fuel Pump

11 Not Used

HC Relays Usage

9 Cooling Fan K2

13 Cooling Fan K1

Mini Relays Usage

7 Ignition 87 Main

15 Ignition 15

16 SEC Air Pump

17 Window and MirrorDefogger

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block isin the driver side of the instrumentpanel. To access the fuses:

1. Open the fuse block cover bypulling out at the top.

2. Remove the lower edge of thecover.

3. Remove the cover.

To reinstall the cover, reverse thesteps above.


252 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 InfotainmentSystem/Hands-freePhone

2 Not Used



5 Information Display/Parking Assist

6 Cigarette Lighter

7 Power Outlet




11 Interior Fan

12 Not Used

13 Power Seat

Fuses Usage

14 DiagnosticConnector

15 Airbag

16 Central LockingSystem/Tailgate

17 Air ConditioningSystem

18 Not Used

19 Not Used

20 Not Used

21 Instrument Cluster

22 Ignition/ElectronicKey System



25 Not Used

26 Not Used


Vehicle Care 253

Relays Usage

1 Trunk Open

2 Not Used

3 RAP Relay

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)


254 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfaces

and weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 254.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealer

for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 267.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.


Vehicle Care 255

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P225/45R18size tires, they are classified aslow-profile tires.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size : The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week (01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third


256 Vehicle Care

week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading 0 269.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only : Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regular

road tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire 0 287 and If a Tire GoesFlat 0 272.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation : Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For more


Vehicle Care 257

information on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure0 260.

(6) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.


258 Vehicle Care

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 260.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 176.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 176.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 176.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.


Vehicle Care 259

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommended

tire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure 0 260 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 176.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.


260 Vehicle Care

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 267.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 269.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 176.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.


Vehicle Care 261

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 176.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire 0 287.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or


262 Vehicle Care

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 262.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 263

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message comeon at each ignition cycle until thetires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. Using the DIC,tire pressure levels can be viewed.For additional information anddetails about the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 110.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low and mustbe inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 176, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 260.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 265, Tire Rotation 0 266 and Tires0 253.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMS

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM-approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit 0 274 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message also


264 Vehicle Care

displays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the malfunctionlight should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 267.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool. A TPMS relearn toolcan also be purchased. See TirePressure Monitor Sensor ActivationTool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).


Vehicle Care 265

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information menuin the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu itemscreen.

5. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message requestingacceptance of the processshould display.

6. Press the SET/CLR buttonagain to confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensor

matching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.


266 Vehicle Care

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 305.

Tires are rotated to achieve amore uniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after the

rotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires 0 267 and WheelReplacement 0 271.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure 0 260 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 176.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 262.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 318.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not get


Vehicle Care 267

grease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)

or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection 0 265 and Tire Rotation0 266.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight to

slow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of the


268 Vehicle Care

vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 255.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 266. However, if it is

necessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,


Vehicle Care 269

load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 261.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 176.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, traction

control, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 267 andAccessories and Modifications0 219.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.


270 Vehicle Care

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the

norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistance

to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.


Vehicle Care 271

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.

Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


272 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tires0 253. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if there ever is a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expectand what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others could

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 273

Warning (Continued)

be badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 129.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

This vehicle may come with a jack,spare tire, and wheel block(s) or atire sealant and compressor kit. Touse the jacking equipment tochange a spare tire safely, followthe instructions below. Then seeTire Changing 0 281. To use the tiresealant and compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit 0 274.

To use the wheel blocks,if equipped, lift the wheel block andlock it into place.


274 Vehicle Care

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ Warning

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust may

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

enter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust 0 190.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ Warning

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 inch) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tire


Vehicle Care 275

sealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 325.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

1. Air Compressor2. Tire Sealant Canister3. Power Plug4. On/Off Button5. Pressure Gauge6. Air Only Hose (Black)7. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 129.


276 Vehicle Care

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 272 forother important safety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit0 280.

Make sure the on/off button (4)is in the off (O) position.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (7)and the power plug (3).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stemis positioned close to theground so the hose willreach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (7)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (3) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets 0 95.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has acigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

8. Press the on/off button (4) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (5) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushesthe sealant into the tire. Oncethe sealant is completelydispersed into the tire, the

pressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

9. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (5). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure 0 260.

The pressure gauge (5) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Caution

If the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant and

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 277

Caution (Continued)

compressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 325.

10. Press the on/off button (4) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire.Therefore, Steps 11–17 mustbe done immediately afterStep 10.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

11. Unplug the power plug (3) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

12. Turn the sealant/air hose (7)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

14. Replace the sealant/air hose(7), and the power plug (3)back in their original location.

15. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (2) and place itin a highly visible location.

Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damaged tireis repaired or replaced.

16. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

17. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

18. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1–11 under “Using theTire Sealant and CompressorKit without Sealant to Inflate aTire (Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 325.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

19. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire or vehicle.


278 Vehicle Care

20. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (2) and sealant/airhose (7) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

21. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

22. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 129.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 272 forother important safety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit0 280.

2. Unlock the air only hose (6)from the sealant canister (2) bypulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air only hose (6) fromthe sealant canister (2).

4. Remove the power plug (3)from the air compressor (1).

5. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stemis positioned close to theground so the hose willreach it.

6. Remove the tire valve stemcap by turning itcounterclockwise.

7. Attach the air only hose (6)onto the tire valve stem andpress the lever down tosecure it.


Vehicle Care 279

8. Plug the power plug (3) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets 0 95.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has acigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

10. Press the on/off button (4) toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (5). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure 0 260.

The pressure gauge (5) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.

12. Press the on/off button (4) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

13. Unplug the power plug (3) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

14. Disconnect the air only hose(6) from the tire valve stem bylifting the lever. Replace the tirevalve stem cap.

15. Replace the air only hose (6)and the power plug (3) back inits original location.

16. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unlock the air only hose (6)from the sealant canister (2) bypulling up on the lever.

2. Pull the air only hose (6) fromthe sealant canister (2).

3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (7)from the compressor (1).


280 Vehicle Care

4. Turn the sealant canister (2) sothe inflator filling hose isaligned with the slot in thecompressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister (2)from the compressor andreplace with a new sealantcanister. See your dealer formore information.

To install a new sealant canister:

1. Align the sealant/air hose (7)with the slot in the aircompressor.

2. Push the sealant canister (2)down and turn it clockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (7)around the air compressorchannel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air only hose (6) ontothe sealant canister inlet andpush the lever down.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kitis located in the trunk, under theload floor, behind an access panel.

To remove the kit:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk0 36.

2. Turn the left knobcounterclockwise and the rightknob clockwise, 90 degrees, atthe same time. Then pull theaccess panel rearward and upto remove it.


Vehicle Care 281

3. Pull the inflator kit rearward.

Squeeze the two tabs of thequick release buckle to removethe tire sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the inflator kit, reverse thesteps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Retainer Nut2. Tool Bag Tether3. Tool Bag4. Spare Tire

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk0 36.

2. Lift the load floor.

3. Turn the retainer nut (1)counterclockwise to remove it.Then remove the tool bag

tether (2) from the stow rod,the tool bag (3) containing thewheel wrench and wheelblocks, and the spare tire (4).

4. Remove the jack, jack handleextension, and two-piecewrench, if equipped.

1. Three-Piece Wrench2. Hex Head Jack3. Jack Handle Extension4. Coin/Pierce Jack5. Two-Piece Wrench


282 Vehicle Care

This vehicle may have one of thefollowing: A coin/pierce jack (4), ajack handle extension (3), and atwo-piece wrench (5), or a hex headjack (2) and three-piece wrench (1).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

This vehicle may have aluminumwheels with exposed wheel nuts.Use the wheel wrench to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.

Or, this vehicle may have steelwheels with plastic covers.

To remove the plastic covers andwheel nut caps, loosen the plasticnut caps with the wheel wrench in acounterclockwise direction.If needed, finish loosening themwith your fingers. The plastic nutcaps will not come off.

If needed, use the flat end of thewheel wrench and pry along theedge of the cover until it comes off.The edge of the wheel cover couldbe sharp, so do not try to remove itwith your bare hands. Do not dropthe cover or lay it face down, as itcould become scratched ordamaged. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until the flat tire is repairedor replaced.

Once you have removed the wheelcover, use the following procedureto remove the flat tire and install thespare tire.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 272 for more information.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise once on eachwheel nut to loosen it. Do notremove them yet.

3. Place the jack near the flat tire.

4. Place the wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 272 for proper wheelblock placement.


Vehicle Care 283

5. If this vehicle is the RS model,locate the front or rear jackcover on the rocker moldingnear the tire being changed.

Place your hand behind theedge of the cover on the rockermolding. Pull down and out toremove the cover.

The cover will remain attachedto the molding by a tether.

6. Place the jack under thevehicle.

7. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handleextension to the jack by slidingthe hook through the end ofthe jack.

If you have a hex head jack,place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head ofthe jack.

Caution

Make sure that the jack lift headis in the correct position or youmay damage your vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

8. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flattire. The location is indicatedby a notch in the flange. Thejack must not be used in anyother position.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.


284 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

Hex Head Jack Shown, Coin/Pierce Jack Similar

9. Raise the jack by turning thehandle clockwise until it comesin contact with the notch in theflange.

Make sure the jack lift headnotch is placed in the flangenotch.

Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there isenough room for the road tireto clear the ground.


Vehicle Care 285

10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

12. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

13. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

15. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheel

(Continued)


286 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

nuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 318 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 318 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

17. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

Front Jack Cover Shown, RearJack Cover Similar

19. If this vehicle is the RS model,snap the jack cover back intoplace.

20. Remove the wheel blocks andreturn them to their properstorage location.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.


Vehicle Care 287

Caution

Wheel covers will not fit on thevehicle's compact spare. If you tryto put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or thespare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

1. Replace the wheel wrench andwheel blocks in the tool bag.

2. Remove the foam containerfrom the rear storagecompartment.

Coin/Pierce Jack Shown, HexHead Jack Similar

3. Place the flat tire in the storagecompartment with the valvestem down.

4. Place the jack and jack handleextension, if the vehicle hasone, in the foam container.

5. Place the foam container insidethe flat tire. Align the hole withthe stow rod.

6. Place the tool bag tether overthe stow rod and the tool bagrear of the flat tire.

7. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseuntil tight.

8. Replace the load floor.

The load floor may not lay flat.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand Tools

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and tools tostore the compact spare tire.

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.


288 Vehicle Care

Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the ABS and Traction Controlsystems may engage until the sparetire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.

Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 239.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 219.


Vehicle Care 289

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.


1. Discharged BatteryNegative Grounding Point

2. Discharged Battery PositiveTerminal

3. Good Battery NegativeTerminal

4. Good Battery PositiveTerminal

The jump start negative groundingpoint (1) for the discharged batteryis the engine block or an enginemounting bolt. Connect to a spot asfar away from the dischargedbattery as possible.

The jump start positive terminal onthe discharged battery (2) is locatedin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle.

The jump start positive terminal (4)and negative terminal (3) are on thebattery of the vehicle providing thejump start.

The positive jump start connectionfor the discharged battery is under atrim cover. Open the cover toexpose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles sothat they are not touching.


290 Vehicle Care

3. Set the parking brake firmlyand put the shift lever inP (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. SeeShifting Into Park 0 187 with anautomatic transmission,or Parking 0 189 with a manualtransmission.

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.Turn off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal on thedischarged battery.

6. Connect the other end of thered positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of thegood battery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) grounding point forthe discharged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.


Vehicle Care 291

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook tosuspension components or axles.Use the proper straps around thetires to secure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck. Ifa wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.

Use the tow eye for towing adisabled vehicle or loading it onto aflatbed car carrier. The tow eyeshould not be used to recover avehicle from an off-road situation.

Caution

Improper use of the tow eye cancause vehicle damage. Usecaution and low speeds toprevent damage to the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing refers totowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.


292 Vehicle Care

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. The towing capacity of thetowing vehicle. Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far the vehicle will betowed. Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. The proper towing equipment.See your dealer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

. If the vehicle is ready to betowed. Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

transmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing (with AutomaticTransmission)

Caution

If the vehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thedrivetrain components could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not tow the vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.

Vehicles with an automatictransmission should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground.If the vehicle must be towed, a dollyshould be used. See "Dolly Towing"later in this section.


Vehicle Care 293

Dinghy Towing (with ManualTransmission)

To dinghy tow the vehicle from thefront with all four wheels on theground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow andthen secure it to the towingvehicle.

2. Shift the transmission toNeutral.

3. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

4. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove fuses 22,

23, and 24 from the instrumentpanel fuse block. SeeInstrument Panel Fuse Block0 251.

Remember to reinstall the fusesonce the destination has beenreached.

Caution

If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle, it couldbe damaged. Never exceed105 km/h (65 mph) while towingthe vehicle.

Caution

Towing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never have thevehicle towed from the rear.

Dolly Towing

To tow the vehicle with the two rearwheels on the ground and the frontwheels on a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.


294 Vehicle Care

2. Shift the automatictransmission into P (Park) or amanual transmission into1 (First) gear.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.Caution

Towing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never have thevehicle towed from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 314.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 295

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thise symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be powerwashed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,comply with the car washinstructions. The windshield wiperand rear window wiper, if equipped,must be off. Remove anyaccessories that may be damagedor interfere with the car washequipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if they

remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.


296 Vehicle Care

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chromeor stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.


Vehicle Care 297

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Shutter System

The vehicle may have a shuttersystem designed to help increasefuel economy. Keep the shuttersystem clean for proper operation.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow and ice.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosenthem or thaw them. Damaged wiperblades should be replaced. SeeWiper Blade Replacement 0 241 formore information.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. If the wiper motor overheats,the windshield wipers will stop untilthe motor cools and the wipercontrol is turned off. See ElectricalSystem Overload 0 247 for moreinformation.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 314.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


298 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, mastercylinder, brake fluid reservoir,vacuum pipes, electric vacuumpump including bracket and venthose, if equipped.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, thesteel fuel door hinge and powerassist step hinges, unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the


Vehicle Care 299

underbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregular

dark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.


300 Vehicle Care

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.


Vehicle Care 301

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently change

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


302 Vehicle Care

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

If equipped, pull up on the rear ofthe floor mat to unlock each retainerand remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.


Vehicle Care 303

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


304 Service and Maintenance

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 304

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 305

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Recommended FluidsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 316

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oil

changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be more


Service and Maintenance 305

frequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 176.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 208.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 220.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 225.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 260.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 265.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 236.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON DIC message displays, havethe engine oil and filter changedwithin the next 1 000 km/600 mi.If driven under the best conditions,the engine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once



a year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 227.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 266.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil 0 225 and Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 227.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant 0 231.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 236.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 294. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. SeeWiper Blade Replacement0 241.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 260.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 265.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 229.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 294.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care 0 294.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 58.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 294.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 239.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 240.



. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 240.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 240.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit0 274.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 45.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Except 1.4L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspectignition coil boots. @

1.4L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspectignition coil boots. @ @

1.8L Engine Only: Replace timing belt, idlerpulley, and timing belt tensioner. (6) @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @

Replace clutch fluid. (6) @ @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 231.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @

Change manual transmission fluid. @ @ @

Except 1.4L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspectignition coil boots. @

1.4L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspectignition coil boots. @ @

1.8L Engine Only: Replace timing belt. (6) @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @

Replace brake fluid. (6) @ @ @

Replace clutch fluid. (6) @ @ @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 231.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(6) Or every three years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 294.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

. A message may indicate whenscheduled maintenance on thetiming belt and othercomponents is required.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 314 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 299 andExterior Care 0 294.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approvedengine oil. See Engine Oil 0 225.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant 0 231.

Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19259104, in Canada 19259105).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1.4L L4 Engine 13272719 A3144C

1.8L L4 Engine 13272720 A3145C

Engine Oil Filter

1.4L L4 Engine 55594651 PF2257G

1.8L L4 Engine 55594651 PF2257G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13356914 CF184

Spark Plugs

1.4L L4 Engine 55585534 41–122

1.8L L4 Engine 55585534 41–122

Wiper Blades

Driver – 60.0 cm (23.6 in) 95430139 —

Passenger – 45.0 cm (17.7 in) 95161606 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 317

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 320

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 318 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Model designation.

. Paint information.

. Production options and specialequipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


318 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 314 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

1.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt

1.8L L4 Engine 6.8 L 7.2 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

1.4L L4 Engine 4.0 L 4.25 qt

1.8L L4 Engine 4.0 L 4.25 qt

Fuel Tank

Standard Fuel Tank 59.0 L 15.6 gal

With RPO NL6 Fuel Tank 48.0 L 12.6 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual.


Technical Data 319

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.4L L4 (LUV) B AutomaticManual

0.60 – 0.70 mm (0.24 –0.028 in)

1.8L L4 (LUW) H AutomaticManual

0.60 – 0.70 mm (0.24 –0.028 in)

1.8L L4 (LWE) G AutomaticManual

0.60 – 0.70 mm (0.24 –0.028 in)

Spark plug gap is for replacement spark plugs.


320 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

1.4L L4 Engine

1.8L L4 Engine


Customer Information 321

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 324

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 324GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 328Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 333Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 333

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


322 Customer Information

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson BoulevardSuite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line/

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of Canada



Limited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800



Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information) :Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information) :View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar VehicleDiagnostic Information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I (Service History) : View andprint dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation) : Select a preferreddealer and view locations, maps,phone numbers, and hours.

r (Warranty TrackingInformation) : Track your vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information) : Viewactive recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 317.

H (Other Account Information) :View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation (if equipped).

F (Live Chat Support) : Chat withonline help representatives.

See my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.

Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Visit the Chevrolet Owner Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatured Articles and Auto CareSections.

. Download owner manuals.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number.

. Telephone number of yourlocation.

. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle’s powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.



. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses may

be reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 805 km (500mi).

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

. Legal fines.

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. If available,diesel fuel delivery may be

restricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify. GeneralMotors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost for



parts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safety

are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle



Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not

specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 325.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number.

. Driver license number.

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.



If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 63.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehicle

repaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information(US and Canada Only)

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/216/220/251/310,ICES‐001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


334 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 338

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription. OnStar requires thevehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Terms &

Conditions and Privacy Statementfor more details including systemlimitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.


OnStar 335

. Obtain the Wi-Fi® hotspot nameor SSID and password,if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive an On-DemandDiagnostics check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyOnStar Emergency Services requirea specific OnStar subscription plan.With Automatic Crash Response, inmany crashes, built-in sensors canautomatically alert a speciallytrained OnStar Advisor who isimmediately connected to thevehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being started.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.


336 OnStar

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Destination Download

Subscribers can have directionssent to the vehicle’s navigationscreen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, press the Go buttonon the navigation screen to begindriving directions. Routes that aresent to the navigation screen canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press=, wait forthe prompt, then say “Wi-Fisettings.” On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi Settings on thescreen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type


OnStar 337

(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, BlackBerry®,or Windows® mobile devices.OnStar Subscribers can access thefollowing services from a mobiledevice:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send directions to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

For OnStar RemoteLink informationand compatibility, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

At Your Service®

OnStar Advisors can providesavings offers from restaurants andretailers on your route, help locatehotels, or book a room.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.


338 OnStar

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar can perform a monthlycheck of your vehicle’s keyoperating systems, including theengine, transmission, antilockbrakes, and other major vehiclesystems. OnStar can also monitortire pressure, if the vehicle isequipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System. If an On-DemandDiagnostics check is needed,pressQ to speak to an Advisor.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages state importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase.PressQ to set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan,every 60 days.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Services,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.


OnStar 339

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpSubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five dayswithout an ignition cycle. If the


340 OnStar

vehicle has not been started forfive days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 216. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacy


OnStar 341

statement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third parties

may unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index and https://www.onstar.com/us/en/support/getdocuments.html

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that the

above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.


342 OnStar

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use of


OnStar 343

the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


344 Index

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 216Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

AgreementsTrademarks and License . . . . . 158

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 229Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Passenger Sensing System . . . .65What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .60

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 101Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

AlertSide Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 206

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 196Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

AudioTheft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 134


Index 345

Audio PlayersCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . 164Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Battery - North America . . . .239, 288Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 241BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 150, 153

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . . 104

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Brakes (cont'd)Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 180Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 246Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 244

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 209

California (cont'd)Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .219, 239, 288

CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 3CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . 89Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 102CheckIgnition Transmission Lock . . . 240Malfunction IndicatorEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .72Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77


346 Index

Child Restraints (cont'd)Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 86Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 162Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 328Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 287CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . 274ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Engine Temperature Gauge . . 100

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 324Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . 330

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 328Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 3Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 333Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 320Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .23Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 174


Index 347

Driving (cont'd)If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 175Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 172Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 176Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 248Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 222Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Engine (cont'd)Cooling System Messages . . . .115Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . . 109Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 190Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 333Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 127Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 129Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 228Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Fog LampsFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209


348 Index

Fuel (cont'd)Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 108Requirements, California . . . . . 209System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 248Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

GGaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 304Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

General Information (cont'd)Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 129Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 109High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 127Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 109

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 164

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 174Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . .180, 182Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . 6Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 42Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . 117Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .26

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24


Index 349

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 255LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 128Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . 102Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Lighting (cont'd)Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 130

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 104Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 107Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 127Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Reduced Engine Power . . . . . . 109Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 100Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . 107

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Warning, Power Steering . . . . . 106

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Locks (cont'd)Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 108Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 305Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 102Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 195Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118


350 Index

Messages (cont'd)Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . .115Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Object Detection System . . . . . .117Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . . .118Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .119Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Mirrors (cont'd)Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 42Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 180

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 227Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 70Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 324

OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 336OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . 335OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics . . . 338Operating ModeOverheated EngineProtection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

OperationInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 136

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . 330

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode . . . . 236

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197


Index 351

Parking (cont'd)Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 240

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 189Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 65Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 219

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 150, 153

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . . 109Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 187Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Power Steering WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . 57

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 332

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 327

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 239, 288

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 331Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 202Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 291Reduced Engine Power Light . . . 109Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 70Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 332General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45


352 Index

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 320Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .58Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .57

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 332General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . 143Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 327Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Seats (cont'd)Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .48Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 84, 86SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Climate Control System . . . . . . . 162Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 220Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 316Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 317Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 327Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . .311

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 206SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Special Application Services . . . . 311Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 32Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 239Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . . 106Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92


Index 353

Steering (cont'd)Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 89Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 333

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 324Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 39Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Tires (cont'd)Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Pressure Monitor Operation . . 262Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 261Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Terminology and Definitions . . 258Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 271When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . .211Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216General Information . . . . . . . . . . .211Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 291Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129


354 Index

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 269Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Identification Number (VIN) . . . 317Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . 120Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 280

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Vehicle DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 104Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 271Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 76Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 241

Documents

2k16 CS6 Chevrolet Cruze Limited 23289323A.ai 1 5/14/2015 … · 2k16_CS6_Chevrolet_Cruze_Limited_23289323A.ai 1 5/14/2015 10:22:48 AM Chevrolet Cruze Limited Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-